Skoda Fabia (2011/05) Owner Manual

Below you will find brief information for Fabia Fabia. This owner's manual provides essential information on operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting your Škoda Fabia. Learn about the vehicle’s controls, safety features, driving tips, and routine maintenance procedures to ensure safe, economical, and environmentally conscious driving. The manual covers everything from unlocking and locking to handling breakdowns and understanding technical data.

PDF

Document

ŠKODA Fabia

OWNER'S MANUAL

s33o.book Page 1 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Introduction You have opted for a Škoda - our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.

Your new Škoda offers you a vehicle featuring the most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment which you will undoubtedly wish to use to the full during your daily motoring. That is why, we recommend that you read this Owner's Manual attentively to enable you to become familiar with your car and all that it offers as quickly as possible.

Please do not hesitate to contact your specialist garage or importer should you have any further questions or any problems regarding your vehicle which may arise. He will be ready at any time to receive your questions, suggestions and criticisms.

National legal provisions, which deviate from the information contained in these operating instructions, take precedence over the information contained in the operating instructions.

We wish you much pleasure with your Škoda and pleasant motoring at all times.

Your

Škoda

Auto

s33o.book Page 2 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

2 Introduction On-board literature

The on-board literature for your vehicle consists of this “

Owner's Manual

” as well as a “ and equipment.

Service schedule

” and a “

Help on the road

”. There can also be other additional operating manuals and instructions on-board (e. g. an operating manual for the radio) depending on the vehicle model If one of the publications listed above is missing, please contact a specialist garage immediately, where one will be glad to assist you in such matters.

One should note that the details given in the vehicle's technical docu mentation always take precedence over those in the Owner's Manual.

Owner's Manual

This Owner's manual describes

all the possible equipment versions

without identifying it a special equipment, model variant or market dependent equipment.

Consequently, this vehicle does

not need to contain all of the equipment components

described in this Owner's manual.

You can find the scope of equipment for your vehicle from the sales docu mentation you were given when purchasing the car. More information is available from your Škoda dealer.

The

illustrations

can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended for general information.

In addition to information regarding all the controls and equipment, the Owner's Manual also contains important information regarding care and operation for your safety and also to retain the value of your vehicle. To provide you with valuable tips and aids. You will learn how you can operate your vehicle

safely

economically

and in an

environmentally

conscious way.

For safety reasons, please also pay attention to the information on accessories, modifications and replacement of parts

 page 174.

The other chapters of the Owner's Manual are also important, however, for proper treatment of your car - in addition to regular care and mainte nance - helps to retain its value and in many cases is also one of the conditions for possible warranty claims.

The Service schedule

contains:       Vehicle data; Service intervals; Overview of the service work; Service proof; Confirmation of mobility warranty (only valid in certain countries); important information on the warranty.

The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of the condi tions for possible warranty claims.

Please always present the Service schedule when you take your car to a specialist garage.

If the Service schedule is missing or worn, please contact the specialist garage where your car is serviced regularly. You will receive a duplicate, in which the previously carried out service work are confirmed.

Help on the road

Contains the most important telephone numbers in individual countries as well as the addresses and telephone numbers of Škoda importers.

s33o.book Page 3 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Contents 3 Contents

Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic functions and important information . . . . .

Instruments and warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gearshift indicator for changing gears . . . . . . . . .

Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer) . .

MAXI DOT display (information display) . . . . . . . . .

Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Locking/Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring Electrical power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the system Safety

6 7 9 9 33 33 34 34 35 38 40 40 41 43 10 10 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 18 18 22 23 25 Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heating the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage net partition (Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bicycle holder in the luggage compartment . . . .

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking ticket holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cigarette lighters and power sockets . . . . . . . . . .

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air conditioning system (manual temperature control) Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . . . .

Starting-off and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting steering wheel position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86 86 86 87 88 77 77 78 78 80 83 64 66 67 69 70 71 71 71 72 73 45 45 49 51 52 54 56 56 57 58 59 60 60 Shifting (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “START-STOP” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II . . . . . Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music playback via Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs AUX-IN and MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The physical principle of a frontal collision . . . . . Important safety information regarding the use of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How are seat belts correctly fastened? . . . . . . . . Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 101 102 106 108 108 89 89 90 91 92 95 95 109 109 109 110 113 113 113 114 115 116 117 117 118 120 121 123

Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 4 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

4 Contents

Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What you should know about transporting children!

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX” system Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system

Driving Tips

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intelligent Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electronic stability programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . .

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Antilock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uphill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrohydraulic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel particle filter (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The first 1 500 kilometres - and then afterwards Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving in an economical and environmentally conscious manner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving through bodies of water on roads . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Care of the exterior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Care of the interior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

141 144 145 145 145 147 147 133 133 133 135 136 136 137 137 137 138 139 140 140 140 125 125 127 130 130 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inspecting and Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Breakdown assistance

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

First-aid box and warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses and light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149 149 149 149 153

Technical data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Used abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

197 197 197 197 197 197 155 155 155 156 158 158 160 161 164 164 168 169 169 174 174 Identification details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.2 l/44 kW - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.2 l/51 kW - EU5/EU2 DDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.2 l/63 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.2 l/77 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.4 l/63 kW - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.6 l/77 kW - EU4, EU2 DDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.4 l/132 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.2 l/55 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.6 l/55 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 198 199 200 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 175

Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 175 175 175 176 176 180 182 184 186 186 191 213

s33o.book Page 5 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Contents 5 Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 6 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

6 Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)

Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)

The Owner's Manual has been systematically designed, in order to make it easy for you to find and absorb the information you require.

Chapters, table of contents and subject index

The text of the Owner's manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy-to-read

chapters

. The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is highlighted at the bottom right of the page.

The

Table of contents

is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed

Subject index

at the end of the Owner's Manual helps you to rapidly find the infor mation you are looking for.

Sections

The majority of

Sections

apply to all models.

Since there is a wide range of different equipment and options available it is clearly unavoidable, despite dividing the contents into sections, that mention may be made of equipment which is not fitted to your vehicle.

WARNING The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING. These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury. While reading the text you will frequently encounter a double arrow followed by a small warning symbol. This symbol is intended to draw your attention to a WARNING note at the end of the section to which you must pay careful atten tion.

Caution

note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle (e. g. damage to gearbox), or points out general risks of an accident.

For the sake of the environment

Environmental

tion.

note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects. This is where you will, for example, find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump-

Brief information and instructions

Each section has a

Heading

This is followed by

Brief information

(in large italic lettering), which tells you the subject which is dealt with in this section.

Most of the illustrations are accompanied by an

Work steps Instruction

(in relatively large letters) which explains to you in a straightforward way the action you have to take. which have to be carried out are illustrated with a hyphen.

Note

A normal

Note

draws your attention in a general way to important information.

Direction indications

All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle.

Explanation of symbols

 End of a section.

 The section is continued on the next page.

Notes

All four kinds of notes, which are used in the text, are always stated at the end of the respective section.

s33o.book Page 7 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Using the system

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data 7

s33o.book Page 8 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

8 Cockpit Fig. 1 Cockpit

s33o.book Page 9 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Cockpit 9

Cockpit General view

This overview will help you to quickly familiarise yourself with the displays and the control elements.

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric exterior mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lever for the multi-functional switch:  Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight flasher  Speed regulating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering wheel:  with horn  with driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 with controls for radio, radio navigation system and phone . . .

Instrument cluster: Instruments and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lever for the multi-functional switch:  Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switch for rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TCS switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switch for hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag . . . .

Depending on equipment fitted:  Operating controls for the heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Operating controls for the air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Operating controls for Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage compartments on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switch passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switch depending on equipment fitted:  Release for luggage compartment door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Interior monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse box in the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41 55 78 49 91 118 101 15 18 52 51 133 78 48 123 37 40 186 78 80 83 73 118 123 Light switch and headlamp beam adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release lever engine compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lever for adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depending on equipment fitted:  Radio  Radio navigation system Rocker switch for the heating on the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depending on equipment fitted:  Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   Selector lever (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rocker switch for the heating on the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depending on equipment fitted: Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 48 158 86 86

Note

 Cars with factory-fitted radio or navigation system are supplied with separate instructions for operating such equipment.

 The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items on right-hand drive models may differ from that shown in  page 8, fig. 1 . The symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left-hand drive models.

58 36 89 96 58 71 74 108

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 10 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

10 Quick Reference Guide

Quick Reference Guide Basic functions and important information

Introduction

The chapter of the brief instruction is used as a quick reference of the most important operating elements of the vehicle. It is necessary to observe all the information which is contained in the following chapters of the Owner's Manual.

Unlocking and locking car Setting steering wheel position

Fig. 2 Remote control key

A Unlocking the vehicle A Unlocking the boot lid A Locking the vehicle A Folding out/folding up of the key Further information  page 39, “Unlocking and locking the vehicle”.

Fig. 3 Adjustable steering wheel: Lever on the steering column/the correct distance of the driver from the steering wheel

You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering wheel to the desired position.

– Pull the lever below the steering wheel down  fig. 3 - left.

– Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning height and forward/back position).

– Push the lever upwards as far as the stop.

You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering wheel to the desired position.

Further information  page 86, “Setting steering wheel position”.

WARNING



Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!



fig. 3 - right. Not maintaining this minimum

 

You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving!

For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving - risk of accident!

s33o.book Page 11 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Seat belt height adjuster

Fig. 4 Front seat: Seat belt height adjuster

– To adjust the belt height press the height adjuster and move it up or down  fig. 4 .

– Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly locked in place.

Further information  page 115, “Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats”.

WARNING Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder - on no account across your neck!

Adjusting the front seats

Quick Reference Guide 11

A Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction A Adjusting height of seat A Adjust the angle of the seat backrest Further information   page 56, “Adjusting the front seats - Variant 1” and page 57, “Adjusting the front seats - Variant 2”.

WARNING Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!

Electric exterior mirror adjustment

   

Fig. 6 Inner part of door: Rotary knob

Heating of the external mirror Adjusting the left-hand exterior mirror Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror Switching off operating control Further information  page 55.

Fig. 5 Controls at seat: Version 1/version 2 Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 12 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

12 Quick Reference Guide

Switching lights on and off

A Turn signal light right A Turn signal light left A Switching over between low beam and main beam lights A Headlight flasher Further information  page 49, “The turn signal   and main beam lever  ”.

Windscreen wiper lever

Fig. 7 Dash panel: Light switch

     Switching off all lights Switching on side lights Switching on the low beam and main beam Fog lights Rear fog light Further information  page 45, “Switching lights on and off  ”.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 9 Windscreen wiper lever

A Intermittent switch A Wipers off A Intermittent wipe A Slow wipe A Fast wipe A one time wipe A Automatic wipe/wash

Rear window wiper

A Intermittent wipe - every 6 seconds A Automatic wipe/wash Further information  page 52, “Windshield wiper”.

Fig. 8 Turn signal and main beam lever

s33o.book Page 13 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Power windows

Fig. 10 Buttons on the driver's door

A Button for the power window in the driver's door A Button for the power window in the front passenger's door A Button for the power window at the rear right door A Button for the power window at the rear left door A Safety switch Further information  page 41, “Buttons for electrical power windows”.

Refuelling

Quick Reference Guide 13

– Hold the fuel tank cap of the fuel filler tube with one hand and unlock it by turning with the vehicle key to the left.

– Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and place the fuel filler cap from above on the fuel filler flap  fig. 11 - right.

Closing fuel filler cap

– Screw on the cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to lock.

– Hold the fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube with one hand and lock it by turning the vehicle key to the right and withdraw the key.

– Press the fuel tank flap closed.

Further information  page 156, “Refuelling”.

Bonnet remote release

Fig. 12 Release lever engine compart ment lid

– Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the left-hand side  fig. 12 .

Further information  page 158, “Bonnet remote release”.

Fig. 11 Right rear side of the vehicle: Fuel filler flap/fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed Opening the fuel filler cap

– Open the fuel filler flap with the hand  fig. 11 - left.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 14 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

14 Quick Reference Guide

Opening the bonnet

Fig. 13 Radiator grille: Locking lever/securing the bonnet with the bonnet support

– Pull on the locking lever  fig. 13 - left, the bonnet is then unlocked.

– Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the opening designed for it  fig. 13 - right.

Further information  page 158, “Opening and closing the bonnet.”.

Inspecting the engine oil level

Fig. 14 Dipstick

A Engine oil

must not

be refilled.

A Engine oil

can

be refilled.

A Engine oil

must

be refilled.

Further information  page 160, “Check engine oil level”.

s33o.book Page 15 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Instruments and warning lights Overview of the instrument cluster

Instruments and warning lights 15

Engine revolutions counter  page 15 Display  with counter for distance driven  page 16  with Service Interval Display  page 17    with Information display  Speedometer  page 16 Coolant temperature gauge  Button for display mode:  Set hours/minutes page 22 page 16   with digital clock  page 18 with Multi-functional display  page 18 Activating/deactivating the second speed in mph or km/h Service interval - Display of the remaining number of days, kilometres or miles to the next Inspection Service / Reset 1) 1) Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips Fig. 15 Instrument cluster

Button for:  Reset trip counter for distance driven   Resetting Service Interval Display Set hours/minutes  Activate/deactivate display mode Fuel gauge  page 16

Engine revolutions counter

The red zone of the rev counter scale A  fig. 15 engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed. The engine control unit restricts the engine speed to a steady limit value.

indicates the range in which the Shift into the next higher gear or select the selector lever position D of the auto matic gearbox before reaching the red zone of the rev counter scale.

Avoid high engine speeds during the driving time and before the engine has been warmed up to operating temperature  page 140.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 16 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

16 Instruments and warning lights For the sake of the environment

Shifting to a higher gear in good time helps to reduce the fuel consumption, mini mises operating noise levels, protects the environment and contributes to a longer life and reliability of the engine.

Speedometer

Warning against excessive speeds

An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilome tres per hour. The acoustic warning signal will switch off again when the vehicle speed goes below this speed limit.

Coolant temperature gauge

The coolant temperature gauge tion is switched on.

A  page 15, fig. 15 operates only when the igni In order to avoid any damage to the engine, please follow the following notes regarding the temperature ranges:

Cold range

If the pointer is in the left-hand area of the scale it means that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid running at high engine speeds, at full throttle and at severe engine loads.

The operating range

The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the mid-range of the scale. The pointer may also move further to the right at high engine loads and high outside temperatures. This is not critical provided the warning symbol  in the instrument cluster does not flash.

If the symbol guidelines   in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the coolant

temperature

is too high or the coolant

level

is too low. Please refer to the following page 28, “Coolant temperature/coolant quantity   ”.

WARNING Pay attention to the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before opening the bonnet and inspecting the coolant level.

Caution

Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant. There is then a risk of the engine over heating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads!

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge A  page 15, fig. 15 only operates when the ignition is switched on.

The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres. The warning symbol ment cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking. There are now about 7 litres of fuel remaining in the tank. This symbol is a reminder for you,

that you must refuel

 in the instru The following is displayed in the information display:

Please refuel.

An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.

On some vehicles, the fuel gauge is shown in the display of the instrument cluster.

Caution

Never run the fuel tank completely empty! An irregular supply of fuel can lead to irregular engine running. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.

Counter for distance driven

The counter for the distance driven is located in the bottom area of the display. The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres (km). In some countries the measuring unit “mile” is used.

Reset button

If you hold the reset button counter is set back to zero.

A  page 15, fig. 15 pressed for about 1 second, the trip

Trip counter for distance driven

The trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since this counter was last reset - in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.

s33o.book Page 17 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Counter for distance driven

The counter for distance driven indicates the total distance in kilometers or miles which the vehicle has been driven.

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instrument cluster

Error

will appear as a permanent text in the display. Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist workshop.

WARNING Never seek to adjust the trip counter for distance driven while driving for safety reasons!

Note

If vehicles which are fitted with the information display the display of the second speed is activated in mph or km/h, this driving speed is indicated instead of the counter for the total distance driven.

Service Reminder

Fig. 16 Service Interval Display: Note

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, the text can differ on the display.

Service Interval Display

Before the next service interval a key symbol indicated after switching on the ignition   fig. 16 and the remaining kilometres are . At the same time, a display appears regarding the remaining days until the next service interval.

Instruments and warning lights 17

The following is displayed in the information display:

Service in ... km or... days.

The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km. or days until the service due date is reached.

A flashing key symbol appears in the display for 20 seconds as soon as the due date for the service is reached,  as well as the following text

Service

The following is displayed in the information display:

Service now!

Display regarding the distance and days until the following service interval

You can use the button A to display the remaining distance driven and the days until the next service interval  page 15.

A key symbol  and a display regarding the remaining kilometers appear for 10 second in the display. At the same time, a display appears regarding the remaining days until the next service interval.

In vehicles with an information display, call this display in the

Settings

 menu.

page 24 The following will be displayed in the information display for 10 seconds:

Service in ... km or... days.

Resetting Service Interval Display

It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display, if a service message or at least a pre-warning is shown on the display of the instrument cluster.

We recommend having this resetting performed by a specialist garage.

The specialist garage:  resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection;   makes an entry in the Service Schedule; affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of the dash panel on the driver's side.

Reset the service interval displays by using the reset button trip counter.

A  page 15 on the In vehicles with an information display, call this display in the

Settings

 menu.

page 24

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 18 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

18 Instruments and warning lights Caution

We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself other wise this can result in the service interval display being incorrectly set, which may also result in problems with operation of your vehicle.

Note

 Never reset the display between service intervals otherwise this may result in incorrect readouts.

 information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the battery of the vehicle is disconnected.

 If the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair, the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display. This work is carried out by a specialist garage.

 After resetting the display with flexible service intervals (QG1), the data displayed are the same as for a car with fixed service intervals (QG2). We therefore recommend having the Service Interval Display reset only by an authorised Škoda Service Partner who is familiar with the procedure for resetting the display with a vehicle system tester.

 Please refer to the brochure Service schedule for extensive information about the service intervals.

Digital clock

The time is set with the buttons A and A  page 15, fig. 15 .

Select the display which you wish to change with the button change with the button A .

A and carry out the In vehicles which are fitted out with the information display, it is possible to set the time in the menu

Time

 page 24.

WARNING The clock should not be adjusted while driving for safety reasons but only when the vehicle is stationary!

Gearshift indicator for changing gears

Fig. 17 Shift recommendation for changing gears

An information for the engaged gear instrument cluster.

A  fig. 17 is shown in the display of the In order to minimise the fuel consumption, a recommendation for shifting into another gear is indicated in the display.

If the control unit recognises that it is appropriate to change the gear, an arrow A is shown in the display. The arrow points up or down, depending on whether it is recommended to shift into a higher or lower gear.

At the same time, the recommended gear is indicated instead of the currently engaged gear A .

Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)

Introduction

The multi-functional indicator appears in the display information display   page 19, fig. 18 or in the page 22 depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle.

The multi-functional indicator offers you a range of useful information.

The outside temperature Driving time Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption  page 20  page 20  page 20  page 20

s33o.book Page 19 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM Range Distance driven Average speed Current speed oil temperature Warning against excessive speeds  page 20  page 21  page 21  page 21  page 21  page 21 In vehicles which are fitted out with an information display, it is possible to switch off the display of some information.

Note

 In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of meas ures.

 If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is not indicated in km/h on the display.

Memory

Instruments and warning lights 19 Single-trip memory (memory 1)

The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the igni tion is switched on until it is switched off. New data will also flow into the calcula tion of the current driving information if the trip is continued

within 2 hours

after switching off the ignition. If the trip is interrupted for

more than 2 hours

, the memory is automatically erased.

Total-trip memory (memory 2)

The total distance driven memory gathers data from any number of individual jour neys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes driving or 1 999 kilometres driven. 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9 999 km distance driven in vehicles with an information display. The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation starts from anew.

The total-trip memory will not, contrary to the single-trip memory, be deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.

Note

All information in the memory

and

is erased if the battery of the vehicle is disconnected.

Using the system

Fig. 18 Multi-functional indicator

The multi-functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories. The selected memory is displayed in the middle of the display field  fig. 18 .

The data of the single-trip memory (memory 1) is shown if a

appears in the display. A

shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance memory (memory 2).

Switching over the memory takes place with the button shield wiper lever.

A  fig. 19 on the wind-

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

The rocker switch  fig. 19 .

General Maintenance

A and the button

Selecting the memory Fig. 19 Multi-functional indicator: Control elements

A are located on the windshield wiper lever – Short-term pressing of the button select the desired memory.

A on the windshield wiper lever allows to

Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 20 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

20 Instruments and warning lights Selecting the functions

– Press the top or bottom rocker switch way, call up in sequence the individual functions of the multi-functional indi cator.

A for longer than 0.5 seconds. In this

Setting function to zero

– Select the memory you want.

– Press button A for more than 1 second.

The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero by button A :     average fuel consumption; distance driven; average speed; Driving time.

You can only operate the multi-functional indicator when the ignition is switched on. After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the one which you last selected before switching off the ignition.

Outside temperature

The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is switched on.

If the outside temperature drops below +4°C, a snow flake symbol (warning signal for ice on the road) appears in front of the temperature indicator and flashes for 10 seconds, then remains displayed together with the outside temperature. At the same time an audible signal sounds. After pressing the rocker switch windshield wiper lever  cated.

page 19, fig. 19 A on the , the function which was shown last is indi-

WARNING Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature display that there is no ice on the road. Please note that black ice may also be present on the road surface even at temperatures around +4 °C - warning, drive with care!

Driving time

The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased, appears in the display of day you must first erase the memory at this moment in time by pressing the A  page 19. If you wish to calculate the driving time from a particular time page 19, fig. 19 .

The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes. 99 hours and 59 minutes in vehicles with an information display. The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.

Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres/100 km. This information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve.

The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed.

The indicated value will be updated every 0,5 seconds while you are driving.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in litres/100 km  page 19. This information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve.

If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time, you must erase the memory at the start of the new measurement using the button A on the windshield wiper lever  page 19, fig. 19 . A zero appears in the display for approx. the first 300 m you drive after erasing the memory.

The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.

Note

The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.

Range

The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display. It indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of fuel in the tank for the same style of driving.

s33o.book Page 21 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM The readout is shown in steps of 10 km. After lighting up of the indicator light for the fuel reserve the display is shown in steps of 5 km.

The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating the range. If you drive in a more economical manner from this moment on, the range will be increased accordingly.

If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), the fuel consumption of 10 ltr./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is adapted accord ingly to the style of driving.

Distance driven

The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display  page 19. If you wish to calculate the distance driven as of a particular time, you must erase the memory at this moment in time by pressing the button windshield wiper lever  page 19, fig. 19 .

A on the The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km or in vehicles with information display, it is 9 999 km. The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.

Average speed

The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in km/hour  page 19. If you wish to determine the average speed over a certain period of time, you must erase the memory at the start of the new measurement by pressing the button A on the windshield wiper lever  page 19, fig. 19 .

A zero appears in the display for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the memory.

The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.

Current speed

The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer, is indicated on the display A  page 15, fig. 15 .

oil temperature

If the oil temperature is lower than 50°C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present, three lines are displayed instead of the oil temperature.

Instruments and warning lights 21

Warning against excessive speeds

This function enables you to set a speed limit and will notify you when this speed limit is exceeded.

Set the speed limit when the vehicle is stationary

– With switch A 

excessive speeds

page 19, fig. 19 , choose the menu point

Warning against

– Press the button A to active the ability to set the speed limit (value flashes).

– Use the button A to adjust the required speed limit, e.g. to 50 km/h.

– Confirm the speed limit that was set with button A , or wait approx. 5 seconds until the setting is saved automatically (the value stops flashing).

This is how you can set the speed limit in 5 km/h intervals.

Set the speed limit when the vehicle is moving

– With switch A , choose the menu point

Warning against excessive speeds

– You can drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h.

– Press button flashes).

A to accept the current speed as the speed limit (the value If you wish to change the speed limit that was set, it is changed in 5 km/h intervals (e.g. the accepted speed of 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h or decreases to 45 km/h).

– Confirm the speed limit that was set by pressing button approx. 5 seconds until the setting is saved automatically (the value stops flashing).

A again, or wait

Changing or removing the speed limit

– With switch A , choose the menu point

Warning against excessive speeds

– Remove the speed limit with button A .

– Pressing the button A again activates the change mode for the speed limit.

If you go faster than the speed limit that was set, you will be notified with an acoustic warning. A

Warning against excessive speeds

appears together with the set limit on the display.

The set speed limit remains stored even after switching off the ignition.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 22 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

22 Instruments and warning lights WARNING Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are fully respon sible for road safety.

Main menu

MAXI DOT display (information display)

Introduction

The information display provides you with information in a convenient way concerning the

current operating state of your vehicle

. The information system also provides you with data (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle) relating to the radio, mobile phone, multi-functional indicator, radio navigation system, the unit connected to the MDI input and the automatic gearbox.

Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on the vehicle when the ignition is switched on and also while driving.

Functional faults, if required repair work and other information are indicated by red symbols  page 23 and yellow symbols  page 23.

Lighting up of certain symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal.

Information and texts giving warnings

are also shown in the display  page 25.

The following information can be shown in the display (depending on the equip ment installed on the vehicle): Main menu Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warn ing Service Interval Display Selector lever position for an automatic gearbox  page 22  page 23  page 17  page 96

Fig. 20 Information display: Control elements

– You can activate the

Main menu

by pressing the rocker switch more than 1 second.

A  fig. 20 for – You can select individual menu points by means of the rocker switch the pushbutton displayed.

A A . When is briefly pressed, the information you have selected is You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle):   

MFD

 page 18

Audio Navigation

 

Phone

 page 102

Vehicle status

 page 23 

Settings

 page 24 The menu point

Audio

is only then displayed when the factory-fitted car radio is switched on.

The menu point

Navigation

is only then displayed when the factory-fitted radio navigation system is switched on.

Note

 If warning messages are shown in the information display  messages can be confirmed with the button order to call up the main menu.

A page 23, these on the windshield wiper lever in

s33o.book Page 23 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM  If you do not activate the information display at that moment, the menu shifts to one level higher every 10 seconds.

 The operation of the factory-fitted radio or the navigation system is described in separate operating instructions to be found in the on-board literature.

Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning

The door, luggage compartment and bonnet ajar warning lights up if at least one door, the luggage compartment or bonnet are not closed. The symbol indicates which door is still open or whether the luggage compartment door or bonnet is

not closed

The symbol goes out as soon as the doors, luggage compartment door and bonnet are completely closed.

A warning signal sounds if the car is driven at a speed of more than 6km/hour and if the engine or the luggage compartment door is open.

Auto Check Control

Car state

The Auto Check Control carries out a check of certain functions and vehicle compo nents. The check is performed constantly when the ignition is switched on, both when the vehicle is stationary, as well as when driving.

Some operational faults, urgent repairs, service work or other information appear in the display of the instrument cluster. The displays are shown with a red or yellow light symbol depending on the priority of the message.

The red symbols indicate

danger

(priority 1) while the yellow symbols indicate a

warning

(priortity 2). Information for the driver may also appear in addition to the symbols  page 25.

There is at least one error message when the term soon as possible the displayed error messages.

Vehicle status

error messages are shown on the display under the message e.g. is displayed in the menu. After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is displayed. Several

1/3

. This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is displayed. The respective messages are displayed one after the other in an interval of 5 seconds. Check as As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always indicated again. After the first display, the symbols are indicated without information for the driver.

Instruments and warning lights 23

If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol and text in the display:  Priority 1 - three warning signals  Priority 2 - one warning signal

Red symbols

A red symbol signals danger.

– Bring the vehicle to a stop.

– Switch the engine off.

– Investigate the function indicated.

– Obtain professional assistance.

Meaning of the red symbols:   Engine oil pressure too low Overheated clutches of the automatic gear box DSG  

Three

successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears.

page 28 page 95

Yellow symbols

A yellow symbol signals a warning.

Check the relevant function as soon as possible.

The meaning of the yellow symbols:  Check engine oil level, engine oil sensor faulty  page 28

One

warning signal will sound if a yellow symbol appears.

If several operational faults of priority 2 exist, the symbols appear one after the other and are each illuminated for about 5 seconds.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 24 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

24 Instruments and warning lights

Set-up

You can change certain settings by means of the information display. The current setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top below the line.

You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle):         

Language MFD Data Time Winter tyres Units Alternative speed displayed Service Interval Factory Setting Back

After selecting the menu point

Back

you will reach one level higher in the menu.

Language

Here you can set in which language the warning and information texts should be displayed.

Displays of the MFA

Here you can switch off or on certain displays of the multi-functional indicator.

Time

Here you can set the time, the time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the time change summer/winter time.

Winter tyres

Here you can set at which speed a warning signal should sound. This function is used for e.g winter tyres with the permissible maximum speed less than the maximum speed of the vehicle.

When exceeding the speed, the following is displayed on the information display:

Snow tyres max. speed ... km/h Measures

Here you can set the units for temperature, consumption and distance driven.

Second speed

Here you can switch on the display of the second speed in mph or in km/h 2) .

Service

Here you can have the kilometers still to be driven and the days until the following service interval shown and the Service Interval Display reset.

Factory Setting

After selecting the menu

Factory setting

the factory setting of the information display is restored.

2) Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.

s33o.book Page 25 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Warning lights

Overview

The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.

Instruments and warning lights 25

       Turn signal lights (to the left) Turn signal lights (to the right) Main beam Low beam Rear fog light Failure of the light bulbs Dynamo

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

 page 26  page 26  page 26  page 26  page 26  page 27  page 27

General Maintenance Fig. 21 Instrument cluster with warning lights

    Fog lights Electrohydraulic power steering EPC fault light (petrol engine) Glow plug system (diesel engine)    Coolant temperature/coolant level Fuel reserve  page 27  page 27  page 27  page 27  page 28  page 28

Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 26 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

26 Instruments and warning lights

                 Engine oil Open door Fluid level in windshield washer system Control system for exhaust Switch off traction control system (TCS) Tyre pressure monitoring system Selector lever lock Traction control system (TCS) Electronic stability programme (ESP) Antilock brake system (ABS) Brake system Handbrake Speed regulating system Airbag system Diesel particle filter (diesel engine) Seat belt warning light  page 28  page 29  page 29  page 29  page 29  page 29  page 29  page 30  page 30  page 30  page 30  page 31  page 31  page 31  page 31  page 32

WARNING



If you do not pay attention to the warning lights coming on and the corre sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in severe body injuries or major vehicle damage.



The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. It is also essential to observe all warnings



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment”.

 

Note

Arrangement of the indicator lights depends on the model and model version.

Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols (priority 1 - danger) or yellow symbols (priority 2 - warning).

Turn signal system

  Either the left  turn signal lever.

or right  indicator light flashes depending on the position of the The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a turn signal light fails.

Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash.

Further information about the turn signal system  page 49.

Main beam

 The indicator light  comes on when the main beam is selected or also when the headlight flasher is operated.

Further information about the main beam  page 49.

Low beam

 The indicator light  comes on when low beam is selected  page 45.

Rear fog light

 The warning light  comes on when the fog light is on  page 47.

s33o.book Page 27 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Instruments and warning lights 27

Bulb failure

 The warning light  comes on if a bulb is faulty:   up to 2 seconds after the ignition is switched on; when switching on the defective light bulb.

The following text e.g will be displayed in the information display:

Check front right dipped beam!

The rear side lights and the licence plate lighting require several light bulbs. The indicator light parking light (in one rear light unit) are defective. Check regularly the function of the light bulbs.

 only lights up if all light bulbs of the licence plate lighting or the

Alternator

 The warning light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on. It should go out after the engine has started.

If the warning light does not go out after the engine has started, or comes on when driving, drive to the nearest specialist garage. The vehicle battery will be discharged in this case so switch off all non-essential electrical components.

Caution

If the warning light  comes on when driving and in addition the warning light  (cooling system fault) also comes on in display, you must then stop the car immedi ately and switch the engine off - risk of engine damage!

Fog lights

 The warning light  comes on when the fog lights are operating  page 47.

Electrohydraulic power steering

 The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up contin uously, a fault exists in the electrohydraulic power steering. The power steering operates with reduced steering assist or is completely without function.

Further information  page 137.

WARNING Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.

Note

 If the yellow warning light  goes out after starting the engine again and a short drive, it is not necessary to visit a specialist garage.

 If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the yellow warning light  comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.

 There is no power-assisted steering support when the vehicle is being towed without the engine running or when the power-assisted steering is defect. The vehicle is fully steerable however. There is however increased force required to turn the steering wheel.

EPC fault light



(petrol engine)

The  (Electronic Power Control) warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

If the warning light  flashes after starting the engine or flashes while driving, a fault exists in the engine control system. The engine management system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.

Glow plug system



(diesel engine)

The warning light heat position) A   lights up for a

cold

engine when switching on the ignition (pre page 86. Start the engine after the indicator light goes out.

The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine is at a

normal operating temperature

or if the outside temperature is above +5 °C. This means that you can start the engine

right away

There is a fault in the glow plug system if the

warning light

assistance.



does not come on

lights up continuously

; contact a specialist garage as soon as possible to obtain If the

warning light

control. The engine management system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.

 begins

to flash

while driving, a fault exists in the engine

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 28 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

28 Instruments and warning lights

Coolant temperature/coolant quantity

  The warning light  lights up until the engine reaches operating temperature 3) . Avoid running at high engine speeds, at full throttle and at severe engine loads.

The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the warning light  lights up or flashes while driving.

An audible signal sounds as a warning signal.

In this case stop and switch the engine off

and check the coolant level; top up the coolant as necessary  page 163, “Replenishing the coolant”.

Do not continue your journey

engine damage.

if for some reason it is not possible under the condi tions prevailing to top up with coolant.

Keep the engine switched off

and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe If the coolant is within the specified range, the increased temperature may be caused by an operating problem at the coolant fan. Check the fuse for the coolant fan, replace it if necessary  page 190, “Fuse assignment at the battery (automatic gearbox)”.

If the warning light  does not go out although the coolant is at the correct level and also the fuse of the fan is in proper order,

do not continue driving

. Contact a specialist garage to obtain assistance.

Please refer to the following guidelines  page 161, “Cooling system”.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Check coolant! Owner's manual! .

WARNING If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning light system



page 48, “Switch for hazard warning lights



”.

Fuel reserve

 The warning light  comes on, if the fuel level is less than 7 litres.

An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.

3) Not valid for vehicles with information display.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Please refuel! Range...km .

Engine oil

 

The warning light



lights up red (low oil pressure)

The warning light comes on for a few seconds 4) when the ignition is switched on.

Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off

oil as necessary  page 160.

if the warning light does not go off after the engine has started or flashes while driving. Check the oil level and top up with 3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.

Do not continue your journey

damage.

if for some reason it is not possible under the condi tions prevailing to top up with oil.

Keep the engine switched off

and obtain profes sional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine

Do not drive any further

if the warning light flashes even if the oil is at the correct level. Do not run the engine not at idling speed either. Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Oil Pressure Engine off! Owner's manual! . . .

The warning light



lights up yellow (oil quantity too low)

If the warning light lights up yellow, the quantity of oil in the engine is probably too low. Check as soon as possible the oil level or top up  page 160 with engine oil.

A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Check oil level! .

The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds. If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on again after driving about 100 km.

The warning light



flashes yellow (engine oil level sensor faulty)

A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible signal and the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has been switched on.

4) The warning light  on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switching the ignition on, but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too low.

s33o.book Page 29 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist garage.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Oil sensor workshop! .

WARNING



If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning light system



page 48.



The red oil pressure light



is not an oil level indicator! One should there fore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably after every refueling stop.



Pay attention to the following instructions



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before checking the coolant fluid level and opening the bonnet.

Open door

 The warning light  comes on if one or several doors are opened or if the boot lid is opened. If one of the doors opens while driving, the warning light lights  up and an audible signal sounds. The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.

In vehicles with an information display, this warning light is replaced by a vehicle symbol.

 page 23

Windshield washer fluid level

 The warning light  comes on when the ignition is switched on if there is insuffi cient fluid in the windshield washer system. Top up with liquid  page 168.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Top up wash fluid! .

Control system for exhaust

 The warning light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on.

If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up when driving, a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component. The engine management

Instruments and warning lights 29

system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.

Anti-spin regulation (ASR)

 The warning light  lights up if the TCS system is switched off.

Further information about the TCS  page 134.

Tyre pressure monitoring

 The warning light  lights up, if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres. Reduce the speed and check or correct as soon as possible the inflation pressure in the tyres  page 169.

An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.

If the warning light flashes  , there is a system fault. Visit the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified.

Further information about the tyre pressure monitoring system  page 138.

WARNING



When the warning light



lights up, immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please stop the vehicle without delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their inflation pres sures.



Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved roads) the warning light



can be delayed or does not light up at all.

Note

If the battery has been disconnected, the warning light  comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.

Selector lever lock



(automatic gearbox)

If the

green

warning light  lights up, operate the brake pedal. This is necessary, in order to be able to move the selector lever out of the position

Further information about the selector lever lock  page 97.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 30 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

30 Instruments and warning lights

Traction control system (TCS)

 The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated.

The warning light  lights up permanently if there is a fault in the TCS system.

The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.

If the warning light  comes on immediately after starting the engine, the TCS system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the TCS system can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light goes out, the TCS system is fully functional again.

Further information about the TCS  page 134, “Traction control system (TCS)”.

Note

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.

 comes

Electronic stability programme (ESP)

 The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

If the ESP helps to stabilise the vehicle (for example when applying and releasing a braking force to an individual wheel), then the indicator light  flashes.

The warning light  lights up permanently if there is a fault in the ESP system.

The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.

If the warning light  comes on immediately after starting the engine, the ESP system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the ESP system can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light goes out, the ESP system is fully functional again.

Further information on the ESP  page 133, “Electronic stability programme (ESP)”.

Note

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.

 comes

Antilock brake system (ABS)

 The warning light  shows the functionality of the ABS.

The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition has been switched on or when starting the engine. The warning light goes out after an automatic check sequence has been completed.

A fault in the ABS

The system is not functioning properly if the ABS warning light within a few seconds after switching on the ignition, does not light up at all or lights up while driving. The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system. Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriately as you will not know how great the damage is.

 does not go out Further information about ABS  page 136, “Antilock brake system (ABS)”.

A fault in the entire brake system

If the ABS warning light  comes on together with the brake system warning light  , there is a fault not only in the ABS but also in another part of the brake system  .

WARNING



If the brake system warning light warning light

 

comes on together with the ABS stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir



page 164, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.



Pay attention to the following instructions



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before checking the brake fluid level and opening the bonnet.



If the brake fluid is at the correct level, the ABS control function has failed. The rear wheels may then block very rapidly when braking. In certain circum stances, this can result in the rear end of the car breaking away - risk of skidding! Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified.

Brake system

 The warning light with the ABS.

 lights when the level of brake fluid is too low or there is a fault If the warning light  flashes and an audible signal sounds three times, check the brake fluid level  .

stop

and

s33o.book Page 31 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Instruments and warning lights 31

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Brake fluid Owner's manual .

If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the brake system (e.g. distribution of brake pressure), the ABS warning light same time the brake system warning light starts flashing   the ABS but also another part of th brake system is defective comes on and at the . Be aware that not only  .

An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.

One should get used to high pedal forces, an extended free play of the brake pedal and long braking distances when carefully driving to the specialist garage.

For further information on the brake system  page 135, “Brakes”.

WARNING



Pay attention to the following instructions before checking the brake fluid level and opening the bonnet ment”.



page 158, “Working in the engine compart-



If the brake system warning light switching on the ignition or comes on when driving, stop immediately and check the brake fluid in the reservoir

 

does not go out a few seconds after page 164, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.

Handbrake

 The warning light is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6 km/h.

 also comes on if the handbrake is applied. An audible warning The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Release parking brake! .

Cruise control

 The warning light  lights up, when operating the speed regulating system.

Airbag system



Monitoring the airbag system

The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or comes on or flashes while driving  . This also applies if the warning light does not come on after the ignition is switched on.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Error: Airbag .

The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one airbag has been switched off.

The following situation applies if the front, side and head airbags or belt tensioner have been switched off using the vehicle system tester:

 The warning light  lights up for 3 seconds after switching on the ignition and then flashes for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated! .

If the passenger front airbag has been switched off using the switch (for switching off airbags) in the end face of the dash panel on the front passenger side:

 switched on;   the warning light  comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has been switching off the airbag is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting up of the yellow indicator light in display page 123.

    

WARNING Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident.

Note

Further information about switching off airbags  airbags”.

page 123, “Deactivating

Diesel particlulate filter



(diesel engine)

If the warning light  comes on, this means that soot has accumulated in the diesel particle filter because of the frequent short distances.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 32 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

32 Instruments and warning lights

In order to clean the diesel particlulate filter, the vehicle should be driven at an even speed of at least 60 km/h at engine speeds of 1 800 - 2 500 rpm for at least 15 minutes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged (automatic gearbox: position

) when the traffic situation permits it. This increases the exhaust temperature and the soot deposited in the diesel particle filter is burnt.

Always pay attention to the valid speed limits  .

The warning light filter.

 goes out after the successful cleaning of the diesel particle If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light warning light 

owner's manual Car documentation!)

 does not go out and the begins to flash. In the information display

Diesel-particle filter

appears. Afterwards the engine control unit shifts the engine into the emergency mode, which only has a reduced power output. After switching the ignition off and on again the warning light  comes on.

Have the vehicle inspected without delay by your specialist garage.

WARNING



If you do not pay attention to the warning light coming on and the corre sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in injuries or major vehicle damage.



Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic conditions. The route indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic.

Caution

As long as the warning light  lights up, one must take into account an increased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine.

Note

Further information about diesel particle filter  (diesel engine)”.

page 139, “Diesel particle filter

Seat belt warning light

 The warning light  comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt. The warning light only goes out if the driver or front passenger has fastened his seat belt.

If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver or front passenger, a permanent warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km/h and simultaneously the warning light  flashes.

If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next 90 seconds, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light nently.

 lights up perma In case of a load on the front passenger seat e.g. a bag (this is not recommended for safety reasons) the warning light  indicates that the seat belt is not fastened.

Further information on the seat belts  page 113, “Why seat belts?”.

s33o.book Page 33 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Unlocking and locking Vehicle keys

Description

Unlocking and locking 33 Note

Please approach an authorised Škoda Service Partner if you lose a key since he can obtain a new one for you.

Changing the battery in the remote control key

Fig. 22 Set of keys without remote control/Keys with remote control key

Two keys are provided with the vehicle. Depending on the equipment, your vehicle can be equipped with keys without radio remote control  fig. 22 - left, or with radio remote control  fig. 22 - right.

WARNING



Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle - even if it is only for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of injury!



Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has come to a stop. The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally - risk of accident!

Caution

 Each key contains electronic components; therefore protect them against mois ture and severe shocks.

 Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean as impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a negative effect on the proper operation of the locking cylinder and the ignition lock.

Fig. 23 Remote control key - remove cover/remove battery

Each remote control key contains a battery which is housed under the cover  fig. 23 . If the battery is discharged, the red indicator light after pressing a button on the remote control key battery yourself:  fig. 22 A A does not light up . We recommend that you have the batteries of the key replaced by an authorised Škoda Service Partner. You should, however, proceed as follows if you wish to replace the discharged – Fold open the key.

– Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver at the points of the arrows A .

– Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down wards at the point of the arrow A  fig. 23 .

– Insert the new battery. Ensure that the “+” symbol on the battery is facing upwards. The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover.

– Position the battery cover on the key and press on it until it is heard to lock in place.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 34 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

34 Unlocking and locking For the sake of the environment

Dispose of a used battery in accordance with environmental regulations.

   nised

Note

Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.

The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery.

If it is still not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control key even after replacing the battery, this means that the system has to be synchro  page 39.

Electronic immobiliser

The electronic immobiliser prevents the vehicle being operated by an unauthorised person.

An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deacti vated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. The elec tronic immobiliser is automatically activated when you withdraw the ignition key from the lock.

Note

It is only possible to start the engine of your car with a Genuine Škoda key with the matching code.

Locking/Unlocking

Valid for vehicles without a central locking system:

Locking from outside

The securing knob will move upwards or downwards in the door when unlocking or locking.

Locking from inside

All closed vehicle doors are locked by pressing the securing knobs from the inside. The doors cannot be opened from the outside when the securing knobs have been pressed. The vehicle doors can be opened from the inside as follows:  the door is unlocked by actuating the door-opening lever;  The door opens upon actuating the door-opening lever again.

Note

 The opened door cannot be locked with the securing knob. This prevents the possibility of forgetting the key in the locked vehicle.

 The opened doors at the rear and the front passenger door are locked by pressing the securing knob and slamming the door closed.

 Please refer to the safety guidelines  in “Description” on page 35.

Child safety lock

The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside.

Fig. 24 Switching child safety lock on: for vehicles without or with central locking system

The rear doors are equipped with a child safety lock. You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.

Switching child safety lock on

– On vehicles without central locking system, turn the slot of the safety lock on the left door to the left  fig. 24 , on the right door turn it to the right.

– On vehicles with central locking system, turn the slot of the safety lock on the left door to the right, on the right door turn it to the left  fig. 24 .

Switching child safety lock off

– On vehicles without central locking system, turn the slot of the safety lock on the left door to the right, on the right door turn it to the left.

– On vehicles with central locking system, turn the slot of the safety lock on the left door to the left, on the right door turn it to the right.

So long as the child safety lock is switched on it is not possible to open the door from the inside with the door opening lever. In this case the door can be opened only from the outside.

s33o.book Page 35 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Unlocking and locking 35

Central locking system

Description

Unlocking or locking the vehicle causes

all

doors to be unlocked or locked at the same time by the central locking system. The boot lid is unlocked when opening. It can be opened by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate  page 37.

Operation of the central locking system is possible:    from the outside using the vehicle key  page 36; using the buttons for the central locking system  with a remote control key  page 38, page 36;

Indicator light in the driver's door

After locking the vehicle, the indicator light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards it will begin to flash at longer intervals.

If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system  page 35 is not operating, the indicator light in the driver door blinks for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.

If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds, afterwards lights up for about 30 seconds and then flashes slowly, there is a fault in the central locking system or interior monitor  page 40. Visit a specialist garage to obtain assistance.

Convenience operation of windows

One can open and close the electrically powered windows when unlocking and locking the vehicle  page 42.

Opening a single door

This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver's door. The other doors remain locked and are only unlocked when the command is repeated.

This function can be activated by a specialist garage.

Automatic locking and unlocking

All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed of about 15 km/h.

If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again. The driver can also unlock the vehicle by pressing the button system.

 of the central locking This function can be activated by a specialist garage.

WARNING Locking the doors prevents involuntary opening in an exceptional situation (an accident). Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside, for example at road crossings. Locked doors do, however, make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - danger to life!

Note

 In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle.

 Only the front door which is fitted with a locking cylinder can be unlocked and locked using the key if the central locking system fails. You can lock or unlock manu ally the other doors and the boot lid.

  Emergency locking of the door  page 37.

Emergency unlocking of the boot lid  page 38.

Safe securing

The central locking system can be equipped with a for attempts to break into your vehicle.

safe securing

system. Locking the vehicle from the outside causes the door locks to be automatically blocked. The indicator light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards it will begin to flash at longer intervals. It is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside. This acts as an effective deterrent You can deactivate the safe securing system by locking twice within 2 seconds.

If the safe securing system is not operating, the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer inter vals after about 30°seconds.

The safe securing system is again activated the next time the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.

If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is deactivated, you can open the vehicle from the inside by pulling on the door opening lever. The door is unlocked and opened at the same time.

WARNING If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti vated, there must not be any person and animals in the vehicle as it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 36 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

36 Unlocking and locking WARNING (continued) make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!

Note

 The anti-theft alarm system is also activated with the deactivated safe securing system when locking the vehicle. Interior monitoring is however not activated.

 You will be notified of the activation of safe locking after the vehicle is locked with the following message vehicles with an information display, the following messages appears

deadlock! Owner's manual!

CHECK DEADLOCK

in the instrument cluster display. In

Check

Unlocking the vehicle using the key

Fig. 25 Turning the key for unlocking and locking the vehicle

– Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the direction of travel (unlock position) A  fig. 25 .

– Pull on the door handle and open the door.

 All the doors (only the driver's door on vehicles with anti-theft alarm system) are unlocked.

  The boot lid is then unlocked.

  The switched on interior lights come on over the door contact.

The safe securing system is deactivated.

The windows open provided the key

is held

in the unlock position.

 The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing if the car is not fitted with an anti-theft alarm system  page 40.

Note

If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system, you must insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds after unlocking the door in order to deactivate the anti-theft alarm system. The

alarm will be trig gered

if you do

not switch on

the ignition within 15 seconds.

Locking the vehicle with the key

– Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the opposite direction of travel (lock position) A  fig. 25 .

    All the doors and the boot lid are locked.

The switched on interior lights will switch off over the door contact.

 The windows and the electric sliding/tilting roof close provided the key is

held

in the lock position.

The safe securing system is activated immediately.

The indicator light in the driver door begins flashing.

Note

If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.

Button for the central locking system

Fig. 26 Centre console: Central locking button

If the vehicle was not locked from the outside, you can also unlock and lock it with the rocker switch without the ignition switched on.

s33o.book Page 37 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Unlocking and locking 37 Locking all doors and the boot lid

– Press button A  page 36, fig. 26 . The symbol  in the button comes on.

Unlocking all doors and the boot lid

– Press button A  page 36, fig. 26 . The symbol  goes out in the button.

The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using the button A :  It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).

 You can unlock the doors individually from the inside and open them by pulling the door opening lever.

 As long as one door is opened, the vehicle cannot be locked in order to avoid inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle.

 In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle.

WARNING The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off. All the doors and the boot lid are locked. Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle since it is difficult to provide assistance from the outside when the doors are locked. Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!

Note

The door opening lever and the buttons for the central locking system do not operate if the safe securing system is activated  page 35.

Emergency locking of the doors

Fig. 27 Emergency locking of the door

An emergency locking mechanism is located on the rear side of the doors which have no locking cylinder; it is only visible after opening the door.

Locking

– Remove the panel A  fig. 27 .

– Insert the key into the slot A and turn it into the horizontal position in the direction of the arrow (mirror-inverted on the right doors).

– Re-insert the panel.

After closing the door, you can no longer open it from outside. The door can be unlocked from the inside by pulling the door opening lever once and then opening from the outside.

Luggage compartment door

Using the system Safety Driving Tips Fig. 28 Unlock the boot lid/handle of the boot lid General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 38 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

38 Unlocking and locking Opening the boot lid

–

In vehicles with central locking

press the button in the driver's door  page 37, fig. 28 - left and open the boot lid in the direction of arrow  page 37, fig. 28 - right.

–

In vehicles with central locking

press the lever above the number plate and open the boot lid in the direction of arrow  page 37, fig. 28 - right.

Closing the boot lid

– Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing  .

A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the boot lid.

WARNING



Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other wise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock is closed - risk of accident!



Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!



Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it could crack - risk of injury!

Note



After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 1 second and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

before closing the boot lid.

This applies only if the vehicle was locked  The function of the hand grip above the licence plate is deactivated when starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour for vehicles with central locking. The function of the hand grip is activated again when the vehicle has stopped and a door is opened.

Emergency unlocking of the boot lid

Fig. 29 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid

If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid as follows: – Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards  page 59.

– Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim in the direction of arrow A  fig. 29 to the stop.

– Unlock the lock A under the trim in the direction of arrow A .

– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.

Remote control

Description

You can use the remote control key:    to unlock and lock the vehicle; unlocking boot lid.

electrically open and close the windows.

The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key. The receiver is located in the interior of the car. The operating range of the remote control key is approx. 10 m. But this range can be reduced if the batteries are weak.

The key has a fold-open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine.

If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or a new unit installed, it is then necessary for an authorised Škoda Service Partner to initialise the system. Only after this is it possible to again use the remote control.

s33o.book Page 39 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM  on.

Note

The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched  The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interfer ence from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).

 The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system only responds to the remote control at less than 3 metres away  page 33.

 If the driver door is opened, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote control.

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

Using the system Safety Fig. 30 Remote control key Unlocking the vehicle

 – Press the button A  fig. 30 for about 1 second.

Locking the vehicle

 – Press button A for about 1 second.

Deactivating safe securing system

– Press button A twice in 2 seconds. Further information  page 35.

Boot lid remote release

 – Press button A for about 1 second. Further information  page 37.

Driving Tips Unlocking and locking 39 Folding out of the key

– Press button A .

Folding up of the key

– Press button A and collapse the key bit in the housing.

The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked. The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the vehicle using button A but do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds. The safe securing system/anti-theft alarm system will be reactivated again. This func tion is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.

Display of the locking

The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly locked.

If the vehicle is locked by pressing the button A and some doors or the boot lid are not closed, the turn signal lights flash only after closing.

WARNING If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti vated, there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!

Note

 Operate the radio remote control only when the doors and boot lid are closed and you have visual contact with the vehicle.

 Once in the car, do not press the lock button  of the radio remote control before inserting the key into the ignition lock to prevent the car from being inadvertently locked and the alarm system being switched on. Should this happen, press the unlock button  of the radio remote control.

Synchronisation of the remote control

If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it is possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no longer synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the radio-operated key are actu ated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery on the remote control was replaced.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 40 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

40 Unlocking and locking

This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows:  Press any button on the remote control.

 pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1 minute.

Anti-theft alarm system

Description

The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle. The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle.

How is the alarm system activated?

The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically when the vehicle is locked with the key on the driver's door or by using the radio remote control. It is activated 30 seconds after locking the door.

How is the alarm system deactivated?

The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated if the vehicle is unlocked by only using the radio remote control. The anti-theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal.

Once you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door you then have to insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds after opening the door in order to deactivate the anti-theft alarm system. The

alarm will be triggered

if you do

not switch on

the ignition within 15 seconds.

When is the alarm triggered?

The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored:         Bonnet, Boot lid, Doors, Ignition lock, Vehicle inclination  Vehicle interior  page 40, page 40, A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply.

Socket of the factory-fitted towing device.

An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon nected while the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

How is the alarm switched off?

You switch the alarm off if you unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control or if you switch the ignition on.

Note

 The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years. More detailed information is avail able by a specialist garage.

 Before leaving the car, check that all the doors, windows and the electric sliding/tilting roof are properly closed in order to ensure that the anti-theft alarm system is fully operational.

 Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of the radio remote control from other vehicles.

Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring

The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring detect movements inside the vehicle interior and then trigger the alarm.

Fig. 31 Button for interior monitor and towing protection monitoring

The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are operated with the button  . You can switch the interior monitor and the towing protection moni toring off if there is a possibility that movements from (e.g. children or animals) inside the vehicle interior or if the vehicle must be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed, might trigger the alarm.

s33o.book Page 41 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Switch off the interior monitor and towing protection monitoring

– Switch off the ignition.

– Open the driver door.

– Press the button  on the driver door  page 40, fig. 31 .

– Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds. The interior monitor and the towing protec tion monitoring are switched off.

The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again automatically the next time the car is locked.

Note

 You can switch the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring off if there is a possibility that movements from (e.g. children or animals) inside the vehicle interior or if the vehicle must be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed, might trigger the alarm.

 You can also switch off the interior monitor and the towing protection moni toring, by deactivating the safe securing system  page 35.

 When the ignition key is removed or a door is opened, the symbol in the button lights up red.

 Lighting up of the symbol in the button does not confirm that the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on.

Electrical power windows

Buttons for electrical power windows

Unlocking and locking 41

The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on.

Opening a window

– A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door. The process stops when one releases the button.

– Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by pressing the button up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.

Closing a window

– A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the door. The closing process stops when one releases the button.

– Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by pulling the button up to the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately.

The buttons for the individual windows are located in the operating part of the armrest of the driver's door  fig. 32 , front passenger door and on the rear doors.

Buttons for the power windows in the armrest for the driver

Safety pushbutton

You can deactivate the buttons for power windows at rear doors by pressing the safety pushbutton A  fig. 32 . The buttons for power windows at rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton A again.

If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the indicator light A  in the safety

WARNING



If you lock the vehicle from the outside, do not leave any person in the vehicle since it is no longer possible to open the windows from the inside in an emergency.

Fig. 32 Buttons on the driver's door/Buttons on the rear doors Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 42 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

42 Unlocking and locking WARNING (continued)



The system is fitted with a force limiter the window!



page 42. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres. You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may other wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in



It is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors (safety pushbutton) transported on the rear seats.

A 

page 41, fig. 32 when children are being Caution

 erly.

Keep the window glass clean to ensure that electric power windows work prop   In the event of a freezing up of the windscreen, first of all eliminate the ice page 151 and then operate the power windows otherwise the power window mechanism could be damaged.

Note

 After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows for a further 10 minutes. The power windows are switched off completely once you open the driver or front passenger door.

 When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds.

Force limiter of the power windows

The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter. It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.

If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres.

If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres.

You must try to close the window once again within 10 seconds after the window has gone down twice, even if the obstacle was not yet removed, the closing process is stopped. During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched on.

The force limiter is only switched off, if you attempt to close the window within the next 10 seconds -

the window closes now with full strength!

If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.

WARNING You should take particular care when closing the windows! You may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the window!

Window convenience operation

You can open and close the electrically powered windows as follows when unlocking and locking the vehicle (only close the sliding/tilting roof):

Opening a window

– Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the unlock position or press the unlock button of the radio remote control until all the windows are opened.

Closing a window

– Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position or press the lock button of the radio remote control until all the windows are closed.

You can interrupt the opening or closing operation of the windows immediately by releasing the key or the lock button.

WARNING The system is fitted with a force limiter the window!



s33o.book Page 43 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Unlocking and locking 43

Operational faults

Electrically operated power windows do not operate

If the battery of the car has been disconnected and then reconnected, the electri cally operated power windows do not operate. The system must be activated. Proceed as follows in order to re-establish the function:    Switch on the ignition, slightly pull on the upper edge of the relevant button and hold it until the window is closed, release the switch,  you must pull the respective switch again in upward direction for approx. 3 seconds.

Operation in winter

Ice accumulating on the surface of the windows during the winter may result in a greater resistance when closing the windows and the window may stop and move back several centimetres It is necessary to put the force limiter out of operation in order to close the window  page 42, “Force limiter of the power windows”.

WARNING The system is fitted with a force limiter the window!



 erly.

Electric sliding/tilting roof

Description

Fig. 33 Detail of the headliner: Control dial for the power sliding/tilting roof

The sliding/tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial  fig. 33 and only functions when the ignition is switched on. The control dial has several positions.

After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open, close and tilt the sliding/tilting roof for approx. 10 minutes. It is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof after opening one of the front doors, however.

Note

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the sliding/tilting roof does not close fully. Here you have to set the control dial to the switch position A and press it forward for about 10 seconds.

Opening and tilting

Comfort position

– Turn the switch to position A  fig. 33 .

Opening fully

– Turn the switch to position tion).

A and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned posi-

Tilting roof

– Turn the switch to position A .

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 44 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

44 Unlocking and locking

When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the wind noise is much less.

The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open. You can slide the sun screen into the opened or closed position by hand when the sliding/tilting roof is closed.

Caution

It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it in order to prevent damaging the opening mechanism and the seal.

Closing

Sliding closed/closing the sliding/tilting roof

– Turn the switch to position A  page 43, fig. 33 .

Safety closing

The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If an obstacle (e.g. ice) prevents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens completely. You can close the sliding/tilting roof completely without force limiter by pressing the switch to the position  page 43, fig. 33 roof to close completely  .

A at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding/tilting

WARNING Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury!

Convenience operation

You can also close an open sliding/tilting roof from the outside.

– Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position or press the lock button of the remote control until the sliding/tilting roof is closed  .

The closing operation stops when one releases the key or the lock button.

WARNING Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury! The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing.

Emergency operation

Fig. 34 Detail of the headliner: Points for positioning screwdriver/opening for positioning the key

You can close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof by hand if the system is defect.

– Position the flat blade of a screwdriver carefully against the rear edge of the cover for the electrical drive at the points of the arrows A  fig. 34 on the left.

– Pull the cover down.

– Insert an Allen key, Group 4, up to the stop into the opening at the point of the arrow A and close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof  fig. 34 on the right.

– Press on the cover again by first of all inserting the plastic lugs and then pushing the cover up.

– Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.

Note

It is necessary after each emergency operation (using Allen key) to move the sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. Here you have to turn the control dial forward to the switch position seconds.

A  page 43, fig. 33 and press for about 10

s33o.book Page 45 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Lights and Visibility 45

Lights and Visibility Lights

Switching lights on and off



Fig. 35 Dash panel: Light switch/fuse box: Switch for daylight driving lights Switching on side lights

– Turn the light switch  fig. 35 - left into position  .

Switching on the low beam and main beam

– Turn the light switch into position  .

– Press the main beam lever forward in order to switch on the main beam  page 49, fig. 39 .

Switching off lights (except daylight driving lights)

– Turn the light switch into position O.

During the engine start, the low beam lights are switched off automatically.

On vehicles fitted with

right-hand steering

the position of the switches differs to some extent from the position shown on  fig. 35 . The symbols which mark the switch positions are identical, however.

WARNING Never drive with side lights on - risk of accident! The side lights are not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by other Using the system Safety Driving Tips WARNING (continued) oncoming traffic. In this case, always switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor.

Note

 In vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights (in the bumper below the main headlights) these lights also serve as side lights.

 An audible warning will sound if you withdraw the ignition key and open the driver's door when the vehicle lights are still on.

 driver's door is closed (ignition off). The vehicle can be parked with the side lights on.

The acoustic warning signal is switched off over the door contact when the  If the car is parked for a lengthy period, we recommend switching off all lights, or leaving only the parking lights switched on.

 The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord ance with the legal requirements.

 In the event of cool or humid weather conditions, the headlights can be misted up from inside.

 The temperature difference between interior and external area of the head light lenses is decisive.

 When the driving lights are switched on, the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period. The headlight lenses can possibly mist up at the border areas.

  It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights.

This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system.

“DAY LIGHT”

In some countries, the national legal provisions require that the vehicles are equipped with the function daylight driving lights.

Activating daylight driving lights

– Remove the cover of the fuse box on the left side of the dash panel  page 186.

– Turn the light switch into position O  fig. 35 - left.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 46 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

46 Lights and Visibility

– Switch on the switch for daylight driving lights  fig. 35 - right.

Deactivating daylight driving lights

– Switch off the switch for daylight driving lights  page 45, fig. 35 - right.

– Turn the light switch to the position side lights fig. 35 - left.

 or low beam   page 45,

Activating daylight driving lights on vehicles with “START-STOP”

– Switch off the ignition.

– Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel, at the same time slide it to the top and hold it in this position.

– Switch on the ignition - wait until the right-turn signal light flashes 4x.

– Switch off the ignition - an audible signal sounds, which confirms the activation of the daylight driving lights.

– Release the turn signal light lever.

Deactivating daylight driving lights on vehicles with “START-STOP”

– Switch off the ignition.

– Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel, at the same time slide it to the bottom and hold it in this position.

– Switch on the ignition - wait until the left -turn signal light flashes 4x.

– Switch off the ignition - an audible signal sounds, which confirms the deactiva tion of the daylight driving lights.

– Release the turn signal light lever.

On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights or in the front bumper, the parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on when activating the function daylight driving lights (neither front nor rear).

If the vehicle is not equipped with separate lights for daylight driving lights, the combination of the low beam, the parking lights (front and rear) including the licence plate light is used as daylight driving lights.

In some countries, the national legal provisions require that the rear parking lights also come on together with the separate lights for daylight driving lights when acti vating the function daylight driving lights.

Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function

For a better cornering illumination, the halogen projector headlights with cornering light function are set in the optimal position in line with the vehicle speed and the steering angle.

If the warning light fault is confirmed.

 comes on while driving or after the ignition is switched on, a

WARNING If there is a fault in the halogen projector headlights with cornering light func tion, the warning light



lights up in the instrument cluster. The halogen projector headlights with cornering light function are automatically lowered to the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic. Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened. Drive carefully and have the car inspected immediately by a specialist garage.

Tourist light

Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function

This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system, driving on the left/right, without dazzling the oncoming vehicles. When the mode “tourist light” is active, the side to side swivel of the headlights is deactivated.

Activating tourist light

Before activating the tourist light, the following conditions must be met: Ignition switched off, light switched off (light switch in the position O), control dial for the headlamp beam adjustment in the position

, no gear engaged or selector lever in the position

(automatic gearbox), tourist light deactivated.

– Switch on the ignition.

Up to 10 seconds after the ignition is switched on: – Turn the light switch to the position   page 45.

– Engage the reverse gear (manual gearbox) or move the selector lever into the position

(automatic gearbox).

– Turn the control dial for headlamp beam adjustment from the position

to the position

 page 48.

s33o.book Page 47 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Deactivating tourist light

Before deactivating the tourist light, the following conditions must be met: Ignition switched off, light switched off (light switch in the position O), control dial for the headlamp beam adjustment in the position

, no gear engaged or selector lever in the position

(automatic gearbox), tourist light activated.

– Switch on the ignition.

Up to 10 seconds after the ignition is switched on: – Turn the light switch to the position   page 45.

– Engage the reverse gear (manual gearbox) or move the selector lever into the position

(automatic gearbox).

– Turn the control dial for headlamp beam adjustment from the position

to the position

 page 48.

The adaptation of the halogen projector headlights must be performed as follows  page 145.

Fog lights



Fig. 36 Dash panel: Light switch Switching on fog lights

– First of all turn the light switch into position  or   fig. 36 .

– Pull the light switch out to the

first

detent A .

The warning light switched on   lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are page 25.

Lights and Visibility 47

Fog lights with the function “CORNER”

The fog lights with the function “CORNER” are designed for a better illumination of the surrounding area near the vehicle when corning, parking etc.

The fog lights with the function “CORNER” are adjusted according to the steering angle or after switching on the turn signal light 5) in the following circumstances:  the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of maximum 40 km/h;   the daylight driving lights are not switched on; Low beam switched on.

A fault in the system of the fog lights with the function “CORNER” is confirmed by the warning light  lighting up.

Note

If the fog lights are switched on, the function “CORNER” is not active.

Rear fog light



Switching on the rear fog light

– First of all turn the light switch into position  or   fig. 36 .

– Pull the switch into position A . The fog lights light up at the same time.

If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights, the rear fog light is switched on by turning the light switch to the position  and is pulled out directly to the position switch does not have two positions, but only one position.

A . This The warning light switched on   lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is page 25.

Only the rear fog light of the trailer lights up if the vehicle is fitted with a

towing device from Škoda original accessories

and when you are towing a trailer which is fitted with the rear fog light.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

5) If both switch on versions are conflicting, for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 48 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

48 Lights and Visibility Caution

The rear fog light should only be switched on if visibility is particularly poor (conform with any varying legal provisions) to avoid dazzling vehicles behind your vehicle.

Headlamp range adjustment



Once the low beam is switched on you can then adapt the range of the headlights to the load of the vehicle.

Switch for hazard warning lights



Fig. 37 Dash panel: Lights and Visibility

– Turn the control dial  fig. 37 until you have adjusted the low beam so that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Settings

The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads: Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.

All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.

All seats occupied, luggage compartment laden.

Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment laden.

Caution

The headlamp range should always be adjusted in a way that:  the headlights do not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming traffic,  and the range is sufficient for safe driving.

Fig. 38 Dash panel: Switch for hazard warning lights

– Press switch   fig. 38 to switch the hazard warning light system on or off.

All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on. The indicator light for the turn signals and the indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time. You can also switch on the hazard warning light system if the ignition is switched off.

The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is deployed in the event of an accident.

Please comply with any legal requirements when using the hazard warning light system.

Note

Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example:  you encounter traffic congestion;  your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs.

s33o.book Page 49 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

The turn signal

 

and main beam lever



The parking lights and headlight flasher are also switched on and off using the turn signal and main beam lever.

Fig. 39 Turn signal and main beam lever

The turn signal and main beam lever perform the following functions:

Right



and left



turn signal light

– Push the lever upwards A or downwards A  fig. 39 .

– If you only wish to flash three times (the so-called convenience turn signal), push the lever briefly up to the upper or lower pressure point and release it.

– Turn signal for changing lanes - in order to only flash briefly, move the lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position.

Main beam

 – Switch on the low beam.

– Push the lever forwards in direction of arrow A .

– If you push the lever into the initial position in the direction of arrow beam is switched off.

A the main

Headlight flasher

 – Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (spring-tensioned position) - the main beam and warning light  in the instrument cluster come on.

Parking light

 – Switch off the ignition.

Lights and Visibility 49

– Push the lever up or down - the right-hand or left-hand parking light is switched on.

Information concerning the function of the lights.

 The

turn signal system

only operates when the ignition is switched on. The corresponding warning light  or  in the instrument cluster also flashes.

  The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve.

The side light and rear light on the appropriate side of the vehicle are switched on when the

parking light

ignition is switched off.

is selected. The parking light function only operates if the  An acoustic warning signal will sound when the driver's door is opened if the lever is not in the middle position after removing the ignition key from the ignition lock. The acoustic warning signal will stop just as soon as the driver's door is closed.

Caution

Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if this does not risk dazzling other road users.

Note

 If you have switched on the right or left turn signal light and you switch off the ignition, the parking light is not automatically switched on.

 Use only in accordance with the legal requirements the described lighting and signal systems.

Interior lighting

interior vehicle lighting - version 1

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Fig. 40 Interior lighting - version 1 Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 50 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

50 Lights and Visibility Door contact switching mechanism (front and rear doors)

– Press the switch  A in the direction of the centre of the light, the symbol page 49, fig. 40 appears.



Switching the interior light on

– Press the switch appears.

in the direction of the edge of the light, the symbol 

Switching the interior light off

– Press the switch A into the middle position

Reading lights

 – Press on one of the switches or left reading light on or off.

A  page 49, fig. 40 in order to switch the right On vehicles with central locking, the interior light is switched on for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked, when a door is opened or after withdrawing the ignition key (if the relevant switch is in the door contact position). The inner light goes out out immediately after the ignition is switched on.

A time delay switch causes the inner lighting on vehicles without a central locking system stays on for a few seconds after the doors have been closed. The inner light goes out out immediately after the ignition is switched on.

The interior lighting is switched off after about 10 minutes when a door has been left open in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle.

Note

We recommend having the bulb replaced by a specialist garage.

interior vehicle lighting - version 2

Fig. 41 Interior lighting - version 2

The rear interior lighting  fig. 41 is actuated by moving the switch to the symbol  , O or to the middle position  .

The same principles apply for interior lighting version 2 as for Interior lighting - version 1  page 49.

Rear interior lighting

Fig. 42 Rear interior lighting

The rear interior lighting is operated by pressing the button  fig. 42 .

The button has two positions for the interior lighting at the rear. In the first position, the interior lighting is switched on permanently, in the second position (after pressing) it is switched via the door contacts.

Note

We recommend having the bulb replaced by a specialist garage.

s33o.book Page 51 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Lights and Visibility 51

Lighting of the storage box on front passenger side

– When opening the flap of the storage box on the front passenger side the lighting in the storage box comes on.

– The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and goes out when the flap is closed.

Luggage compartment light

The lighting comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened. If the lid remains open for more than about 10 minutes, the luggage compartment lighting switches off automatically.

For the sake of the environment

As soon as the window is de-iced or free from mist, the heating should be switched off. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel economy  page 144, “Saving electricity”.

Sun visors

Visibility

Rear window heater

Fig. 43 Switch for rear window heater

– You can switch the rear window heater on or off by pressing the switch  fig. 43 - the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out.

 The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running.

The rear window heater

switches off

automatically after 7 minutes.

If the on-board voltage drops, the rear window heater is switched off automatically, the warning light flashes in the button.

Fig. 44 Sun visor: swivelling out

You can pull the sun visor for the driver or front passenger out of the fixture and swivel it toward the door in the direction of the arrow A  fig. 44 .

The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers. Push the cover in direction of arrow A .

WARNING The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 52 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

52 Lights and Visibility

Windshield wiper and wash system

Windshield wiper

You can operate the windscreen wipers and automatic wipe/wash using the windscreen wiper lever.

Fig. 45 Windscreen wiper lever

The windscreen wiper lever  fig. 45 has the following positions:

Finger-operated wiping

– If you wish to wipe the windscreen only

briefly

, push the lever into the sprung A

Intermittent wiping

– Position the lever up into position A .

– Set with the switch A the desired break between the individual wiper strokes.

Slow wipe

– Position the lever up into position A .

Fast wipe

– Position the lever up into position A .

Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen

– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into the spring-tensioned position the wash system and the windscreen wipers will operate.

A , – Release the lever. The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper continues for another 1 - 3 wiper strokes (depending on the period of spraying of the wind screen).

Wiping the rear window pane

– Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position widescreen wiper will operate every 6 seconds.

A  fig. 45 , the

Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window pane

– Push the lever away from the steering wheel into the spring-tensioned position A , the windscreen wiper and wash system will operate.

– Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the windscreen wiper to continue for another 1 - 3 wiper strokes (depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen).

The lever will stay in position after releasing it

A .

Switching windscreen wipers off

– Move the lever back into its home position A .

The windscreen wipers and the windscreen washer system only operate if the igni tion is switched on.

The rear window will be wiped again if the window wipers are on when reverse gear is selected.

The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the ignition is switched on.

Top up with wash liquid  page 168.

WARNING



Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving



page 53.



Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.

 

In the event of a freezing up of the windscreen, first of all remove the ice page 151 and then operate the windscreen wiper otherwise the windscreen wiper blades could be damaged.

s33o.book Page 53 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Caution

In frosty weather, please first of all check whether the windscreen wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen before switching them on. Switching on windscreen wipers when the windscreen wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen may result in damage both to the windscreen wiper blades and the motor of the windscreen wipers!

Note

The content of the windscreen wiper reservoir is 3.5 litres. On vehicles which are equipped with a headlight cleaning system, the content of the reservoir is 5.4 litres.

Headlight cleaning system

The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen washer system has been operated for the fifth time, the low beam or main beam are switched on as well as the windscreen wiper lever is held in the position second.

A  page 52, fig. 45 for about 1 You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. Please refer to the following guidelines  page 151, “The headlight lenses”.

You should remove any snow from the fixtures of the washer nozzles and clear ice in winter with a de-icing spray in order to ensure proper operation of the cleaning system.

Caution

Never remove the nozzles from the headlamp washer system by hand - risk of damage!

Lights and Visibility 53

Replacing the wiper blades for the windscreen wipers

Fig. 46 Wiper blade for the windscreen wiper Remove the wiper blade

– Fold windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.

– Press the locking button, in order to unlock the wiper blade and pull off in the direction of arrow.

Attach the wiper blade

– Push the wiper blade until it locks up to the stop.

– Check whether the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.

– Fold the windscreen wiper arm back onto the windscreen.

Windscreen wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility. Wiper blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust, insect remains and preserving wax.

Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left on the windscreen by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems. It is there fore important to

degrease

the lips of the winscreen wiper blades after every pass through an

automatic vehicle wash system

WARNING



If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage to the windscreen.



You should clean the wiper blades regularly with a windscreen cleaner in order to avoid any smears. Clean the windscreen wiper blades with a sponge or cloth if it is very dirty, for example from insect residues.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 54 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

54 Lights and Visibility WARNING (continued)



Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. Windscreen wiper blades are available at specialist garages.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade- version 1 Replacing the rear window wiper blade- version 2

Fig. 47 Wiper blade for the rear window Remove the wiper blade

– Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm  fig. 47 .

– Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand.

– With the other hand unlock the locking button remove the wiper blade.

A in the direction of arrow and

Attach the wiper blade

– Position the wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lock the locking button A .

– Check whether the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.

The same remarks apply here as for  page 53.

Fig. 48 Wiper blade for the rear window Remove the wiper blade

– Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm  fig. 48 .

– Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand.

– With the other hand unlock the locking button in the direction of arrow A .

A and remove the wiper blade

Attach the wiper blade

– Push the wiper blade until it locks up to the stop.

– Check whether the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.

– Fold the windscreen wiper arm back onto the windscreen.

The same remarks apply here as for  page 53.

Rear-view mirror

Manual dimming interior rear-view mirror

Basic setting

– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward.

Dimming mirror

– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror back.

s33o.book Page 55 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Rear mirror

You can adjust the exterior mirrors electrically.

Lights and Visibility 55

  

Note

The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running.

Do not touch the surfaces of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on.

any time, by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.

 You can set the exterior mirrors by hand, if the power setting function fails at Contact your specialist garage if a fault exists with the power setting of the exterior mirrors.

Fig. 49 Inner part of door: Rotary knob

Adjust the rear mirror before commencing to drive so that there is a clear view to the rear.

Dimming the interior mirror

– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror toward rear (the lever on the interior mirror must point forwards in it home position).

Heating of the external mirror

– Turn the rotary knob to position   fig. 49 .

Adjusting the left-hand exterior mirror

– Turn the rotary knob to position  . The movement of the mirror surface is iden tical to the movement of the rotary knob.

Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror

– Turn the rotary knob to position  . The movement of the mirror surface is iden tical to the movement of the rotary knob.

WARNING



Convex (curved outward) exterior mirrors increase the field of vision. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These mirrors are only of limited use, therefore, for estimating distances to the following vehicles.



Use whenever possible the interior rear mirror, for estimating the distances to the following vehicles.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 56 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

56 Seats and Stowage

Seats and Stowage Front seats

Basic information

The front seats have a wide range of different settings and can thus be matched to the physical characteristics of the driver and front passenger. Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for:   safely and quickly reaching the controls; a relaxed, fatigue-free body position; 

achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag system.

The chapters which follow describe the procedure which you should adopt for adjusting the seats.

WARNING

 

Never transport more occupants than the maximum seating in the vehicle.

Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat. Chil dren must be fastened able restraint system.



page 125, “Transporting children safely” with a suit-



The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants.



Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. This is particularly important for the front seat passenger. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!



It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.

WARNING (continued)



Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.



Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except those provided for this purpose (e.g. child safety seat) - risk of accident!

Adjusting the front seats - Variant 1

Fig. 50 Controls at seat Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction

– Pull the lever A  fig. 50 up and push the seat into the desired position.

– Release the lever A and push the seat further until the lock is heard to engage.

Adjusting height of seat

– Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever A upwards.

– Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever A downwards.

Adjust the angle of the seat backrest

– Relieve any pressure on the seat backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the hand wheel A to adjust the angle of the backrest.

The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.

s33o.book Page 57 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms.

  

WARNING Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!

Take care when adjusting the seat! Adjusting the seat without care can lead to bruises or injuries.

The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk of injury!

Adjusting the front seats - Variant 2

Seats and Stowage 57 Adjust the angle of the seat backrest

– Remove the pressure of the backrest (do not lean on it), pull the lever A towards the rear and set the desired angle of the seat backrest with the back – After releasing the lever A , the seat backrest will remain in the set position.

The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.

The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms.

  

WARNING Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!

Take care when adjusting the seat! Adjusting the seat without care can lead to bruises or injuries.

The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk of injury!

Head restraints

Fig. 51 Controls at seat This front seat variant is only available in some countries.

Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction

– Pull the lever (in the middle section) desired position.

A  fig. 51 up and push the seat into the – Release the lever A and push the seat further until the lock is heard to engage.

Adjusting height of seat

– Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever A upwards.

– Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever A downwards.

Fig. 52 Head restraint: Adjusting/pulling out

Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 58 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

58 Seats and Stowage Adjusting the height of a head restraint

– Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it in upward direc tion as desired  fig. 52 - left.

– Move the head restraint downwards if required by pressing and holding the safety button with one hand  fig. 52 - right and by pressing with the other hand the head restraint downwards.

Removing and installing a head restraint

– Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.

– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow  pull the head restraint out.

page 57, fig. 52 - right and – To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the seat backrest far enough until you hear the locking button engage.

The position of the front, rear outer head restraints and the rear middle head restraint is adjustable for height.

The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant. Correctly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protection for the occupants  page 110.

WARNING



The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.



Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk of injury!



If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the lower position.

Heating the front seats

Fig. 53 Rocker switch: Front seat heating

You can electrically heat the seat cushions and the seat backrests of the front seats.

– By pressing the rocker switch in the position A heating to 25 % or 100 % of its power output  or A switch on the front seat fig. 53 .

– To switch off the heating shift the rocker switch into the horizontal position.

WARNING



If, as an occupant, you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. through medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not to use the seat heating of the driver or front passenger seat. This can lead to burns on the back, the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating is used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.

Caution

 You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points in order to avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters.

 Do not use the seat heating if the seats are not occupied by persons or if objects are fastened or stored on them, for example a child seat, a bag etc. A fault of the heating elements in the seat heating can occur.

 Do not clean the seats moist  page 153.

s33o.book Page 59 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Note

The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running. This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.

Rear seats

Folding the rear seats forwards

Fig. 54 Fold the seat cushion forwards/unlock the seat backrest

To enlarge the luggage compartment, the rear seats can be folded forwards, if necessary remove the seat cushions  page 60. The rear seats can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats.

Folding seats forwards

– Before folding the rear seats forwards, you must adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged when the rear seats are folded forwards.

– Pull up the seat cushion in direction of arrow direction of arrow A .

A  fig. 54 and fold forwards in – Unlock the seat backrest by pressing the securing knob  fig. 54 on the right.

A and fold it forwards – Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest.

– The head restraints can be inserted into the relevant holes of the folded forward seat cushions  fig. 55 .

– Fold the seat backrests fully fowards.

Seats and Stowage 59 Move seats into the initial position

– Install the head restraint in the slightly lifted seat backrest.

– Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing knob clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.

– Make sure that the red pin A is covered  fig. 54 on the right.

– Move the seat cushion into its original position.

WARNING



Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat back rests. Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back seat backrests.



The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat cushions and the seat backrests - they must be ready to use.



Pay attention that the seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only then that the three-point seat belt can reliably fulfil its function.



The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment if there is sudden braking - risk of injury!

Note

If the housing of the net partition is installed, first of all fold the left seat backrest forward and then the right double seat backrest.

Inserting head restraints in the seat cushions

Fig. 55 Rear seats: Inserting head restraints in the seat cushions Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 60 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

60 Seats and Stowage

– The rear head restraints can be inserted into the relevant holes of the folded forward seat cushions.

Removing seat squabs

WARNING (continued)



Do not place any footmats or other additional floor coverings in the area of the pedals in order to ensure that all the pedals can be fully depressed and are able to return unobstructed to their initial position - risk of accident!



There must be no objects on the floor which could roll under the pedals. You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or acceler ator - risk of accident!

Fig. 56 Removing seat squabs

The luggage compartment can be increased in size by removing the rear seat.

Removing

– Fold the seat cushion forwards completely.

– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow  seat cushion from its holder.

fig. 56 and remove the

Installing

– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow and place it in its holder.

– Fold the seat cushion back into its original position.

Pedals

Concerning a secure depressing of the pedal, you should use only footmats from the Škoda genuine accessories.

Operation of the pedals must not be hindered!

WARNING



Greater pedal distances may be needed when there is a fault in the brake system.

luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

Please observe the following in the interest of maintaining good handling charac teristics of your vehicle: – Distribute the items of luggage as evenly as possible.

– Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.

– Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or the fixing net  page 61.

In the event of an accident, there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries. The magnitude of the kinetic energy depends on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the object. The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case the more significant factor.

Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an unsecured object with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times its own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg. You can imagine the injuries that can occur, if this “bullet” is flying through the interior compartment and hits an occupant.

WARNING



Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the lashing eyes.



Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other oncoming traffic. This risk is still increased, if the objects which are flying around are hit by a deployed airbag. In this case, the objects which are thrown back can injure the occupants - hazard.

s33o.book Page 61 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Seats and Stowage 61 WARNING (continued)



Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle may be affected when transporting heavy objects as a result of the displacement of the centre of gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly.



The items carried in the luggage compartment should be stored in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward if there are any sudden driving or braking manoeuvres undertaken - risk of injury!



When transporting fastened objects which are sharp and dangerous in the luggage compartment enlarged by folding the rear seats forward or removing the rear seats, ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats seats”.



page 111, “Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear



If the rear seats next to the folded forward seat are occupied, ensure maximum safety, e.g. by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that a folding back of the seat is prevented in case of a rear collision.



Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!



On no account exceed the permissible axle loads and the permissible gross weight of the vehicle - risk of accident!



Never transport occupants in the luggage compartment.

Caution

Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of objects sliding in this area.

Note

Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load  page 169, fig. 148 .

Vehicles of category N1

On vehicles of the category N1, which are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fastening the load.

Fastening elements

Fig. 57 Luggage compartment: Lashing eyes and fastening elements (Fabia)/(Combi)

Fastening eyelets and fastening elements are located on the sides of the luggage compartment for securing the items of luggage  fig. 57 .

You can also attach fixing nets to these fastening eyelets and fastening elements for holding small objects.

WARNING



The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it cannot move during the journey and when braking.



If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents. In order to prevent the items of luggage being thrown forward, always use suitable lashing straps which are firmly attached to the lashing eyes.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 62 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

62 Seats and Stowage

Fixing nets - Net programme Folding hooks

Fig. 58 Fixing net: double horizontal pocket, floor fixing net/double vertical pockets

Fixing examples of the fixing net as double horizontal pocket, floor fixing net  fig. 58 - left, and double vertical pockets  fig. 58 - right.

The fixing nets and the installation instruction are located in the luggage compart ment.

WARNING



The whole strength of the net makes it possible to load the pocket with objects of up to 1.5 kg in weight. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury and net damage!



The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it cannot move during the journey and when braking.

Caution

Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net damage.

Fig. 59 Luggage compartment: folding hook (Fabia)

Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are provided on both sides of the luggage compartment  fig. 59 .

WARNING Please refer to the following guidelines



page 60.

Caution

An item of luggage weighing up to 7.5 kg can be attached to the hook.

Luggage compartment cover

You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head restraints for storing light and soft items.

Fig. 60 Remove/install the luggage compartment cover

s33o.book Page 63 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM The luggage compartment cover can be removed if you want to transport bulky goods.

– Unhook the support straps A  page 62, fig. 60 .

– Remove the luggage compartment cover from the holders A by knocking lightly on the bottom side of the cover in the area between the holders.

– To re-install, place the cover on the contact surfaces of the side trim panel and position the mounts on the cover A above the holders A at the side trim panel.

– Interlock the cover by lightly knocking on the top side of the cover in the area between the holders.

– Attach the support straps A on the boot lid.

WARNING No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something.

Caution

When closing the boot lid, jamming and damage to the luggage compartment cover or the side trim panel can occur if handled in an unprofessional way. Therefore, check the following before closing:  The mounts of the cover A A must be interlocked on the holders of the side trim  The items which are transported must not exceed the level of the luggage compartment cover.

 The cover must not be jammed in the seal of the boot lid when it is in the opened position.

 There must be no object in the gap between the opened cover and the rear seat backrest.

 Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of objects placed in this area.

Note

 When opening the boot lid, lift the luggage compartment cover - risk that objects placed in this area can slip forward!

Seats and Stowage 63

Further positions of the luggage compartment cover

You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head restraints for storing light and soft items.

Fig. 61 Luggage compartment cover in the lower position/stowed behind the rear seats

The luggage compartment cover can also be put into the lower position on the supporting elements  fig. 61 - left.

The luggage compartment cover can also be stowed behind the rear seats  - right.

fig. 61

Caution

In this position, the luggage compartment cover is designed for storing small objects of up to 2.5 kg. in weight.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 64 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

64 Seats and Stowage

Foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi)

Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Combi)

Remove variable loading floor

Fig. 62 Luggage compartment: foldable luggage compartment cover/removing foldable luggage compartment cover Pulling out

– Pull the foldable luggage compartment cover in direction of arrow the stop into the secured position  fig. 62 .

A as far as

Folding

– Press the cover in the handle area in direction of arrow automatically.

A , the cover rolls up

Removing

– Have the foldable luggage compartment cover removed to transport bulky goods by pressing on the side of the cross rod in direction of arrow it out by moving it in direction of arrow A  fig. 62 .

A and taking

WARNING No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something.

Caution

Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater and the fold able luggage compartment cover are not damaged as a result of objects transported in this area.

Fig. 63 Luggage compartment: Fold up variable loading floor/remove

The variable loading floor makes it easier to handle bulky luggage and creates an even luggage compartment floor when the rear seats are folded forward. The maximum permissable surface load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.

Removing the variable loading floor

– Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the locking bolts to the left  fig. 63 .

A by approx. 180° – You can fold together the variable loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow.

– Lift up the variable loading floor in direction of arrow by pulling in direction of arrow A  fig. 63 .

A  fig. 63 and remove it

Installing the variable loading floor

– Place the variable loading floor once folded together onto the carrier rails.

– Fold open the variable loading floor.

– Lock the variabble loading floor by turning the locking bolts to the right.

A by approx. 180°

s33o.book Page 65 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

WARNING Pay attention when installing that the carrier rails and the variable loading floor are correctly fixed, otherwise the occupants are at risk.

Note

If the variable loading floor is installed in the luggage compartment, no flexible storage compartment or fixing net can be installed  page 62.

Remove carrier rails

Seats and Stowage 65

– Press both check points on each carrier rail up to the stop.

– Check the attachment of the carrier rails by pulling it.

WARNING Pay attention when installing that the carrier rails and the variable loading floor are correctly fixed, otherwise the occupants are at risk.

Divide the luggage compartment with variable loading floor

Fig. 64 Luggage compartment: Slacken check points/remove carrier rails Remove carrier rails

– Slacken the check points screwdriver  fig. 64 .

A on the carrier rails using the vehicle key or a flat – Grasp the carrier rail A at the position ments in order to facilitate the removal A  fig. 64 and slacken it by pulling in the direction of the arrow. You can take out the removable storage compart  page 76, “Removeable storage compartments in the luggage compartment”.

– Grasp the carrier rail A at the position of the arrow and take it out.

A , slacken it by pulling in the direction – The carrier rail on the other side of the luggage compartment can be removed in the same way.

Install carrier rails

– Position the carrier rails on the sides of the luggage compartment.

Fig. 65 Dividing the luggage compart ment

The luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floor.

– Lift up the part with the holder and secure it by sliding it into the grooves  fig. 65 .

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 66 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

66 Seats and Stowage

Luggage net partition (Combi)

Use the luggage net partition behind the rear seats

WARNING



Ensure that the seat backrest on the rear seats is securely interlocked in position when the vehicle is fitted with three-point safety belts for the middle rear seat. It is only then that the three-point seat belt can reliably fulfil its func tion.



First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts the front position!



If the rear bulkhead is located behind the rear seats, then always make sure that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked.

Use the luggage net partition behind the front seats

Fig. 66 Pull out the rear bulkhead/roll up Pulling out

– Open the right rear door.

– Fold down the rear seat backrests slightly forwards, which makes it possible to clear the access for unrolling the rear bulkhead.

– Pull the rear bulkhead at the bracket A  fig. 66 A out of the housing A in direction of the – Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts A .

– Insert the other end of the cross rod by pressing into the second mount.

– Press both ends of the cross rod forward into the function position.

– Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the locking button clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest  .

Folding

– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other side and take the cross rod out of the mount A  fig. 66 .

–

Hold

the cross rod in such a way that the luggage net partition can roll up slowly and without damage into the housing A .

If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, you can remove the foldable luggage compartment cover  page 64.

Fig. 67 Pull out the rear bulkhead/roll up Pulling out

– Open the right rear door.

– Fold the surfaces of the seats and seat backrests of the rear seats forward.

– Pull the luggage net partition at the bracket A out of the housing A  fig. 67 .

– First of all insert the cross rod into the mount A on one side.

– Insert into the mount on the other side the second end of the cross rod.

– Press both ends of the cross rod forward into the function position.

Folding

– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other side and take the cross rod out of the mount A  fig. 67 .

s33o.book Page 67 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM –

Hold

the cross rod in such a way that the luggage net partition can roll up slowly and without damage into the housing A .

– Fold the rear seats back into its original position.

WARNING First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts front position!

in the

Removing and installing the luggage net partition housing

Seats and Stowage 67

Bicycle holder in the luggage compartment

Install cross member

Fig. 68 Rear seats: Luggage net parti tion housing Removing

– Open the right rear door.

– Fold the surfaces of the seats and seat backrests of the rear seats forward. First the right then the left backrest.

– Push the rear bulkhead A .

A  fig. 68 in the direction of arrow A and take it out of the mounts of the rear seat backrests on the right in the direction of arrow

Installing

– Position the luggage net partition housing into the mounts in the rear seat backrests.

– Push the luggage net partition housing in the opposite direction of arrow far as the stop.

A as – Fold the rear seats back into its original position.

Fig. 69 Install cross member

– Remove the luggage compartment cover mend you remove the rear bulkhead   page 64; if necessary we recom page 67.

– Take the head restraints out of the rear seat backrests and fold the rear seats in order to extend the luggage compartment as desired.

– Release the fixtures

slightly pulling up

the securing screws already opened.

A at the ends of the cross member by fully loosening and A . The fixtures open when they are not – Position the cross member with the fixed (not pulled out) part onto the right (in direction of travel) lashing eye and then the pull out part eye.

A onto the left lashing – Press the fixtures A on both sides of the cross member until they lock in place and tighten the securing screws A .

– Check the attachment of the cross member by pulling it.

WARNING When transporting bicycles in the luggage compartment, ensure the safety of passengers .

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 68 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

68 Seats and Stowage

Install bicycle carrier

Fig. 70 Install bicycle carrier

– Position the approved bicycle carrier on the cross member, after pulling up the A fig. 70 push the frame side rail (alu-part) towards the cross member until the socket latches, and screw the screw A into the nut.

– Slacken the screw A and take it out of the moveable part of the fixture; posi tion the moveable part of the carrier, depending on bicycle size, into one of the possible positions, so that it does not come in contact with the boot lid. We recommend to place the moveable part of the fixture in such a position that the holes are visible between the screw A and the moveable part.

– Insert the screw A into the desired position and tighten.

Put bicycle into the bicycle carrier

– Slacken the quick tension jack on the fixing axle of the bicycle carrier and adjust according to the width of the bicycle fork.

– Fit the bicycle fork onto the fixing axle and tighten with the quick tension jack  fig. 71 - left.

– Position the left pedal of the bicycle forward, in order to attach the front wheel more easily.

– Slacken the screw can occur.

A  fig. 70 and push the bicycle holder together with the attached bicycle to the left (in the direction of the arrow), so that no collision between the steering arm and the side window of the luggage compartment – Carefully guide the boot lid to the bottom without letting it go and at the same time check if there is adequate room between the steering arm of the bicycle and the window of the boot lid. If necessary adapt the position of the moveable part of the bicycle carrier in such a way that no collision can occur  page 68. – It is best to push the removed front wheel between the crank of the left pedal and the bicycle frame, attach it with a strap to the front fork  fig. 71 - right, and/or to a fixing point.

– Make sure that it does not lead to damage of the trim panel of the luggage compartment, the bicycle and the placed objects.

– Perform the installation of the second fixture and the attachment of the bicycle analogously.

WARNING Place the bicycles in the bicycle carrier in such a position that no collision between the steering arm and the side and/or rear window can occur.

Note

If the front wheel is equipped with disc brake, attach the wheel in such a way that the brake disc is opposite the frame.

Fig. 71 Put in the bicycle/fastening the front wheel

– Remove the front wheel before putting the bicycle into the vehicle.

s33o.book Page 69 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Secure the stability of the bicycles with a strap

Fig. 72 Securing the bicycles with clamps/securing the bicycles with a strap

– To slacken the rubber part of the clamp, push both parts against each other and open the clamp.

– Position the clamp with the rubber part to the front (in direction of travel) as far as possible below the saddle support and close the clamp  fig. 72 .

– When transporting two bicycles tension the strap  saddles, by pushing the bicycles apart.

fig. 72 between the – Hang the carabines at the ends of the strap into the lashing eyes behind the rear seats.

– Pull the strap through the tensioning clasp, first of all on the one side and then on the other side.

– If it is necessary, the position of the bicycles in the vehicle can be additionally rectified.

WARNING



When transporting passengers and objects, which require the seats to be folded forwards, ensure the safety of the passengers being transported.



Place the bicycles in the bicycle carrier in such a position that no collision between the steering arm and the rear window can occur.

Seats and Stowage 69

Roof rack

General information

  any damage which may result to your car is not covered by the warranty agree ments. It is therefore essential to pay attention to the fitting instructions supplied with the roof luggage rack system.

 sliding/tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof.



Caution

Only use roof racks approved by Škoda Auto.

If you use other roof rack systems or if the roof bars are not properly fitted, then On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof, ensure that the opened Ensure that the opened boot lid does not collide with the roof load.

For the sake of the environment

The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption.

Note

If a vehicle is not factory-fitted with roof rails, you can purchase them from Škoda Original accessories.

Attachment points for base roof carrier

Fig. 73 Attachment points for base roof carrier Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 70 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

70 Seats and Stowage Installing

– Insert the attachment points of the roof rack into the mounts of the body so that the pins of the attachment points grasp into the holes of the body.

Note

 Pay attention to the information regarding assembly and disassembly in the attached instructions.

 If you have any questions, please contact a specialist garage.

Roof load

Distribute weight evenly over the roof luggage rack system. The maximum permis sible roof load (including roof rack system) of

75 kg

and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.

You cannot make full use of the permissible roof load if you use a roof luggage rack system with a lower load carrying capacity. The load transported on the roof luggage rack system must not exceed the weight limit which is stated in the fitting instructions.

WARNING



The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably attached - risk of accident!



You must on no account exceed the permissible roof load, the permissible axle loads and the permissible gross weight of your vehicle - risk of accident!



Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle change when you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the displace ment of the centre of gravity and the increased wind attack area - risk of acci dent! You must absolutely adapt your style of driving and the speed of the vehicle to the specific circumstances.

Front cup holder

Fig. 74 Front centre console: Cup holder

You can place two cups or beverage cans into the recesses  fig. 74 .

WARNING



Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves, they may spill - risk of scalding!



Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. glass, porcelain). You might be injured by them in the event of an accident.

Caution

Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking and therefore the electrical components or the seat upholstery can be damaged.

s33o.book Page 71 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Rear cup holder Parking ticket holder

Seats and Stowage 71 Fig. 75 Centre console: Cup holder

You can place one cup or beverage can into the recess  fig. 75 .

WARNING



Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves, they may spill - risk of scalding!



Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. glass, porcelain). You might be injured by them in the event of an accident.

Caution

Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking and therefore the electrical components or the seat upholstery can be damaged.

Fig. 76 Windscreen: Parking ticket holder

The parking ticket holder is designed e.g. for attaching car park tickets in car parks.

The parking ticket must be

removed

before starting off in order not to restrict the driver's vision.

Ashtray

Using the system Safety Driving Tips Fig. 77 Centre console: Ashtray at the front/rear Removing ashtray

– Remove the ashtray  fig. 77 upwards. When removing do not hold the ashtray at the cover - risk of breakage.

Replacing ashtray

– Insert the ashtray vertically.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 72 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

72 Seats and Stowage WARNING Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!

Cigarette lighters and power sockets

Cigarette lighter

You can also use the socket on the cigarette lighter for other elec trical appliances.

WARNING



Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Not paying proper attention or incorrect use the cigarette lighter in an uncontrolled manner may result in burns.



The cigarette lighter and the power socket also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn. This is why you should never leave children unattended in the vehicle!

Caution

Always use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power socket.

Note



Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle - risk of battery draining!

 Further information  parts”.

page 174, “Accessories, changes and replacement of

Power socket in the luggage compartment

Fig. 78 Centre console: Cigarette lighter Using the cigarette lighter

– Press in the button of the cigarette lighter  fig. 78 .

– Wait until the button jumps forward.

– Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use it.

– Insert the cigarette lighter again into the socket.

Using the socket

– Remove the cigarette lighter or the cover of the power socket.

– Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.

The 12 volt power socket can also be used to supply power to additional electrical accessories with a power uptake up to 120 watts.

Fig. 79 Luggage compartment: Power socket

– Open the cover of the power socket  fig. 79 .

– Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.

You can only use the power socket for the connection of approved electrical acces sories with a power uptake up to 120 watts. The vehicle battery will be discharged in the process if the engine is stationary.

The same remarks apply here as for  page 72, “Cigarette lighter”.

s33o.book Page 73 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM Further information  parts”.

page 174, “Accessories, changes and replacement of

Storage compartments

Overview

You will find the following storage facilities in your vehicle: Storage compartments on the front passenger side Storage compartment on the driver's side Stowage compartment for spectacles Stowage compartment in centre console Storage compartment in the front seat Front seat armrest with stowage compartment Storage compartment in the front doors Storage compartments in the luggage compartment Flexible storage compartment Clothes hooks  page 73  page 74  page 74  page 74  page 75  page 75  page 75  page 76  page 76  page 76

WARNING



Please do not place anything on top of the dash panel. Such objects might slide or fall down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic situation - risk of accident!



Ensure that when driving no objects from the centre console of from other storage possibilities may get into the footwell of the driver. You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or accelerator - risk of accident!

Seats and Stowage 73

Storage compartments on the front passenger side

Fig. 80 Dash panel: Storage compart ments on the front passenger side

On some vehicles, the storage compartments are not equipped with lids.

Opening and closing the storage compartments on the front passenger side

– Pull the handle of the lid in direction of arrow  fig. 80 and fold it open.

– Swivel the flap until it is heard to lock.

A pin holder is located inside the lower flap.

WARNING The storage compartments must always be closed when driving for safety reasons.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 74 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

74 Seats and Stowage

Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger side

The storage compartment can be fitted for vehicles with an air conditioning system with a closable inlet for cooled air.

Stowage compartment for spectacles

Fig. 81 Storage compartment: Using cooling system

– You can switch the cooling system on or off using the control dial  fig. 81 .

Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interior air to flow into the storage compartment.

We recommend that you switch off the cooling if it is operating in the heating mode or if you are not using the cooling system for the storage compartment.

Storage compartment on the driver's side

Fig. 83 Detail of the headliner: Stowage compartment for spectacles

– Press on the lid of the stowage compartment, the stowage compartment opens downwards  fig. 83 .

Caution

 The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the specta cles and otherwise must be kept closed.

 Do not place any items which are sensitive to heat in the storage box - you may damage them.

Stowage compartment in centre console

Fig. 82 Dash panel: Storage compart ment on the driver's side

Unlockable compartment below the steering wheel on the left.

Unlocable compartment in the centre console.

Fig. 84 Centre console: Storage compartment

s33o.book Page 75 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Storage compartment in the front seat

Seats and Stowage 75 Opening stowage compartment

– Press the top button and fold up the cover of the storage compartment  fig. 86 on the right.

Note

The moving space of the arms can be restricted if the armrest is folded down. In city traffic the armrest should not be folded down.

Storage compartment in the front doors

Fig. 85 Front seat: Storage compartment

– Tilt the lock to open the flap and pull out the flap  fig. 85 .

– Tilt the lock to close the flap and press flap close.

Caution

The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 kg. in weight.

Front seat armrest with storage compartment

Fig. 87 Stowage compartment in door panel

A bottle holder is located in the area doors.

A of the storage compartment for the front

WARNING Use the area impaired.

A 

fig. 87 of the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not Fig. 86 Armrest: Storage compartment/open storage compartment Fold the armrest

– Press the bottom button on the face end of the armrest  Fold the armrest forwards and release the button.

fig. 86 on the left.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 76 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

76 Seats and Stowage

Removeable storage compartments in the luggage compartment

Fig. 88 Removeable storage compart ments

A storage box is located on both sides in the side trim panel of the luggage compartment.

 fig. 88

Caution

The removeable storage boxes are intended for storing small objects of up to 2.5 kg in weight.

Flexible storage compartment

Fig. 89 Flexible storage compartment

A flexible storage compartment is located on the right side of the luggage compart ment.

Removing

– Take hold of the flexible storage compartment at both upper corners.

– Press the upper corners to the inside and release the storage compartment by pulling upwards.

– Take it out by pulling towards the middle of the vehicle.

Installing

– Insert both ends of the flexible storage compartment into the openings of the right side trim panel of the luggage compartment and push it downwards until it locks.

Caution

The flexible storage compartment is foreseen for storing small objects of up to 8 kg. in weight.

Note

If the variable loading floor is installed in the luggage compartment  page 64, no flexible storage box can be installed.

Clothes hooks

The clothes hooks are located on the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors.

WARNING



Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear.



Use the hooks for hanging only light items of clothing and ensure that there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

 

The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg.

Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this will interfere with the protection offered by the head airbag.

s33o.book Page 77 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Heating and air conditioning system 77

Heating and air conditioning system Introduction

Description and information

The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year.

It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the cooling effect - Air conditioning system  page 83, Climatronic  page 85.

The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order to ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.

After switching on the cooling not an indication of a leak!

Condensation

from the evaporator of the air condi tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal and which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replace ment of compressor).

   Please refer to the information regarding the recirculated air mode for heating page 80 and/or for air conditioning system  page 83 or Climatronic  page 85.

To ensure that the heating and air conditioning systems work properly, do not block up the air outlet vents with any objects.

Using the air conditioning system economically

The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption.

It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow the heated air to escape.

The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window is open.

The desired interior temperature can also be achieved without switching in the cooling system just by switching to fresh air mode.

WARNING



For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.



You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your atten tion and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.

Note

 The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage compartment.

 We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the inte rior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system. This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating

Using the system Safety Driving Tips For the sake of the environment

When you economize on fuel, you also reduce pollutant emissions.

Operational problems

If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5 °C, there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be:  The fuse on the air conditioning system has blown. Check the fuse, replace it if necessary  page 186.

 The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot  page 16.

If you are not able to rectify the operational problem yourself, or if the cooling capacity decreases, switch the cooling system off. Contact a specialist garage.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 78 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

78 Heating and air conditioning system

Air outlet vents

The information provided is valid for all vehicles.

Heating

Using the system

The heating system delivers air into the interior of the vehicle and warms it as required.

Fig. 90 Air outlet vents Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4

– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (air outlet vents 3) or the horizontal wheel (air outlet vents 4) to the position  .

Close air outlet vents 3 and 4

– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (air outlet vents 3) or the horizontal wheel (air outlet vents 4) to the position

Change air flow of air outlet vents 3 and 4

– In order to change the strength of the air flow, swivel the horizontal lamellas with the aid of the moveable adjuster.

– In order to change the lateral direction of the air flow, turn the vertical lamellas with the aid of the moveable adjuster.

You can set the air supply to the individual vents with the air distribution control  fig. 91 . Air outlet vents

and

can also be opened or closed individually.

A Warmed, unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to the setting of the regulator of the heating or the air conditioning system and the atmospheric conditions.

Fig. 91 Heating: Control elements Setting temperature

– Turn the control dial ture.

A  fig. 91 to the right in order to increase the tempera – Turn the control dial A to the left in order to increase the temperature.

Controlling blower

– Turn the blower switch blower on.

A into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to switch the – Turn the blower switch A into position 0 in order to switch the blower off.

– If you wish to shut off the fresh air supply, use the button mode  page 80.

A - recirculated air

Control for air distribution

– You can adjust the direction of the air flow using the air distribution control  page 78.

Rear window heater

– Press button A . Further information  page 51, “Rear window heater”.

s33o.book Page 79 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Heating and air conditioning system 79

All controls apart from the control dial position.

A can be set to any desired intermediate The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.

Note

If the air distribution is positioned towards the windows, the total amount of air is used to defrost the windows and thus no air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the heating comfort.

Set heating

Recommended basic settings of heating controls for:

Setting of the control dial Set-up

Defrosting the windscreen and side windows Free windscreen and side windows from mist The fastest heating Comfortable heating Fresh air mode - ventilation To the right up to the stop Desired temperature To the right up to the stop Desired temperature To the left up to the stop 3 2 or 3 3 2 or 3 Desired position         

Button

A Do not switch on Do not switch on briefly switched on Do not switch on Do not switch on

Air outlet vents 4

Open and align with the side win dow Open and align with the side win dow Opening Opening Opening  

Note

Air outlet vents

 A page 78, fig. 91 .

page 78, fig. 90 .

 We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents

 opened position.

page 78, fig. 90 in the

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 80 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

80 Heating and air conditioning system

Recirculated air mode

In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.

Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.

Switching recirculated air mode on

– Press the button button.

 A  page 78, fig. 91 the warning light lights up in the

Switching recirculated air mode off

– Press again the button  A , the warning light in the button goes out.

The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control A is in position   page 78, fig. 91 . You can also switch recirculated air mode on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing pushbutton  .

WARNING You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.

Air conditioning system (manual temperature control)

Description

The air conditioning system is a combined cooling and heating system. It makes it possible to optimally control the air temperature at any season of the year.

Description of the air conditioning system

It is important for your safety and for your driving comfort that the air conditioning system is operating properly.

The air conditioning system operates when switch the following conditions are met: AC  fig. 92 A is pressed and    engine running, outside temperature above approx. +2 °C and blower switch switched on (positions 1 to 4).

Air at a temperature of about 5 °C may flow out of the vents under certain circum stances when the cooling system is operating. Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature, for example when getting out of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.

Note

 We recommend you have a specialist garage clean the air-conditioning system once every year.

Using the system

Fig. 92 The air conditioning system: Control elements Setting temperature

– Turn the control dial ture.

A  fig. 92 to the right in order to increase the tempera – Turn the control dial A to the left in order to increase the temperature.

Controlling blower

– Turn the blower switch blower on.

A into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to switch the – Turn the blower switch A into position 0 in order to switch the blower off.

– If you wish to shut off the fresh air supply, use the button air mode  page 83.

 A - recirculated

s33o.book Page 81 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Control for air distribution

– You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow using control A .

switching cooling on and off

– Press the button button.

AC A  page 80, fig. 92 . The warning light lights up in the – When you again press the switch AC warning light in the button goes out.

, the cooling system is switched off. The

Note

 The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side windows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the heating comfort.

 The indicator light in the button AC lights up after switching on the system if some of the conditions were not satisfied for operating the air conditioner. It is also used to indicate the system's cooling readiness when all of the conditions have been met  page 80, “Description of the air conditioning system”

Heating and air conditioning system 81 Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 82 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

82 Heating and air conditioning system

Setting air conditioning system

Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes:

Setting of the control dial Set-up Button Air outlet vents 4

Defrost windscreen and side windows - free from mist a) The fastest heating Comfortable heating The fastest cooling optimal cooling Fresh air mode - ventilation Desired tempera ture To the right up to the stop Desired tempera ture To the left up to the stop Desired tempera ture To the left up to the stop 3 or 4 3 2 or 3 briefly 4, then 2 or 3 1, 2 or 3 Desired position         Do not switch on briefly switched on Do not switch on briefly switched on Do not switch on Do not switch on Is activated automati cally b) Switched off Switched off Activated Activated Switched off Open and align with the side window Opening Opening Opening Open and align to the roof Opening a) b) We recommend you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity climates. This can cause the window pane to cool rapidly, and subsequent fogging from the outside.

The indicator light in the button A lights up after switching on the system if some of the conditions were not satisfied for operating the air conditioner. It is also used to indicate the system's cooling readiness when all of the conditions have been met  page 80, “Description of the air conditioning system”  

Note

Controls A , A , A and the buttons Air outlet vents

 page 78, fig. 90 .

A and A  page 80, fig. 92 .

 We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents

 opened position.

page 78, fig. 90 in the

s33o.book Page 83 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Recirculated air mode

In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.

Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.

Switching recirculated air mode on

– Press the button button.

 A  page 80, fig. 92 , the warning light lights up in the

Switching recirculated air mode off

– Press again the button  - the warning light in the button goes out.

The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control A is in position   page 80, fig. 92 . You can also switch recirculated air mode on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing pushbutton  .

Heating and air conditioning system 83 Description of Climatronic system

The cooling operates only if the following conditions are met:  engine running,   outside temperature above approx. +2 °C, AC switched on.

The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to provide cooling at a high load of the engine.

Recommended setting for all periods of the year:

 Set the desired temperature, we recommend 22 °C (72 °F).

  Press the button AUTO  fig. 93 .

Move the air outlet vents

and

so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards.

Switching over between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit

Press and hold the buttons AUTO and AC  fig. 93 at the same time. The informa tion in the desired temperature measuring unit appears in the display.

Note

 We recommend you have a specialist garage clean the Climatronic once every year.

Overview of the control elements

Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)

Description

The Climatronic system is a combination of an automatic heating, fresh air and cooling system which provides optimal comfort for the occupants of the car.

The Climatronic maintains a constant temperature fully automatically, once it has been set. This is achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the outflowing air, the blower stages and the air distribution. The system also takes into account sunlight which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually. The

automatic mode

 page 84 ensures maximum wellbeing of the occupants at all times of the year.

Fig. 93 Climatronic: Control elements Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 84 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

84 Heating and air conditioning system Buttons/control dial

Setting the interior temperature

The displays

Display of selected inside temperature, e.g.: +22 °C (72 °F) Degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit Automatic air conditioning mode De-mist or de-ice the windscreen Air flow to the windscreen, head, upper body and feet Recirculated air mode Air conditioning system switched on Set blower speed

Buttons/control dial

Setting the blower speed Interior temperature sensor Automatic mode De-mist or de-ice the windscreen Air flow to the windows Air flow to head Air flow in the footwell Recirculated air mode Air conditioning system switched on

Note

The interior temperature sensor not glue or cover over the sensor, otherwise it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic.

A is located in the bottom part of the device. Do

Automatic mode

The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temper ature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car.

Switching automatic mode on

– Set a temperature between +18 °C (64 °F) and +29 °C (86 °F).

– Move the air outlet vents

and

, so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards.

– Press the button AUTO ,

AUTO

appears in the display.

The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the button for the air distribution or increasing or decreasing the blower speed. The temperature is nevertheless regulated.

Defrosting windscreen

Defrosting windscreen - switching on

– Press the button   page 83, fig. 93 .

Defrosting windscreen - switching off

– Once again press the button  or the button AUTO .

The temperature control is controlled automatically. More air flows out of the air outlet vents

and

Setting temperature

– You can set the desired interior temperature after switching on the ignition with the control dial A .

You can set the interior temperature between +18 °C (64 °F) and +29 °C (86 °F). The interior temperature is regulated automatically within this range. If you select the temperature below +18 °C (86 °F), “LO” appears in the display. If you select the temperature higher than +29 °C (86 °F), “HI” appears in the display. In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating capacity, respec tively. The temperature is not controlled in this case.

Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (in particular at the leg area) and large differences in temperature, for example when getting out of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.

Controlling blower

There are a total of seven blower stages available.

The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the interior temperature. You can also, however, adapt the blower stages manually to suit your particular needs.

s33o.book Page 85 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Heating and air conditioning system 85

– Turn the control dial A  page 83, fig. 93 to the left (reduce blower speed) or right (increase blower speed).

If you switch off the blower, the Climatronic is switched off.

WARNING



“Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases.

 

Do not switch the Climatronic system off for longer than necessary.

Switch the Climatronic system on as soon as the windows mist up.

Recirculated air mode

In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.

Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.

Switching recirculated air mode on

– Press the button  A  page 83, fig. 93 ,  appears in the display.

Switching recirculated air mode off

– Press button  again, the symbol  in the display goes out.

Note

If recirculation mode is switched on for around 15 minutes, the symbol to flash in the display as a sign that the recirculation mode is switched on long-term. If the recirculation mode is not switch off, the symbol flashes for around 5 minutes.

 will begin

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 86 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

86 Starting-off and Driving

Starting-off and Driving Setting steering wheel position

WARNING (continued)



When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering wheel firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle of the steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases, injuries to the arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed.

Ignition lock

Fig. 94 Adjustable steering wheel: Lever below the steering column/Safe distance to steering wheel

You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering wheel to the desired position.

– Adjust the driver seat  page 56.

– Pull the lever below the steering wheel down  fig. 94 - left  .

– Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning height and forward/back position).

– Then push the lever up against the steering column until it locks into place.

  

WARNING You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving!

The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel fig. 94 - right. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!



For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving - risk of acci dent!



If you adjust the steering wheel further towards the head, you will reduce the protection offered by the driver airbag in the event of an accident. Check that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest.

Fig. 95 Ignition lock positions Petrol engines

A - ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked.

A - ignition switched on A - start engine

Diesel engines

A - interruption of fuel supply, ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked.

A - heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on  You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.

A - start engine

s33o.book Page 87 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Applies to all models: Position

A To

lock the steering

, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin is heard to engage. You should always lock the steering as a general rule if you leave your vehicle. This acts as a deterrent against possible theft of your vehicle  .

Position

A Move the steering wheel back and forward a little if the ignition key cannot, or cannot easily be turned into this position, in order to release the steering lock.

Position

A The engine is started in this position. At the same time switched on low beam or main beam or other electrical components with major power consumption are briefly switched off. The ignition key moves back into position releases the key.

A when one The ignition key must be turned back into position A each time before starting the engine again. The starter repeat lock in the ignition lock prevents the starter being engaged when the engine is running and thus getting damaged.

WARNING



When driving, the ignition key must always be in the position locking of the steering wheel - risk of accident!

(ignition switched on) without the engine running. This position is indicated by the warning lights coming on. If this is not the case, it could result in unexpected



Do not withdraw the ignition key from the lock until the car has come to a stop. The steering lock can engage immediately - risk of accident!



Always withdraw the ignition key if you are going to leave the vehicle, even for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of injury!

Starting-off and Driving 87

Starting the engine

General

You can only start the engine only using an original ignition key.

 Place the gearshift lever into neutral (or place the selector lever to the position

in the case of an automatic gearbox) and put on the handbrake firmly before starting the engine.

 The clutch pedal should be fully depressed when starting the engine which means that the starter only has to crank the engine.

 Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage to the starter.

The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after starting the cold engine until oil pressure can be built up in the hydraulic valve clear ance compensation. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.

If the engine does not start ...

You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid  page 182.

WARNING



Never run the engine in non ventilated or enclosed areas. The exhaust gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death.



Never leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running.

Caution

 The starter may only be operated (ignition key position A ), if the engine is not running. If the starter is immediately operated after switching off the engine, the starter or the engine can be damaged.

 Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads as long as the engine has not yet reached its normal operating temperature - risk of damaging the engine!

 aid Do not leave the engine running when towing - risk of damaging the engine. In vehicles with catalytic converters, there is a risk of unburnt fuel from getting into the catalytic converter where it will ignite. This in turn would damage the catalytic converter, and destroy it. You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start  page 182, “Jump-starting”.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 88 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

88 Starting-off and Driving For the sake of the environment

Never warm up the engine when the vehicle is standing. Drive off right away. When driving the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower.

Petrol engines

These engines are fitted with a starter system which selects the correct fuel-air mixture for every external air temperature.

   Do not operate accelerator before and when starting engine.

Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.

does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary  It is possible that the fuse on the electrical fuel pump is defect if the engine still  page 186.

If the engine does not start, contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.

It may be necessary, if the engine is

very hot

, to slightly depress the accelerator after the engine has started.

Diesel engines

Glow plug system

Diesel engines are equipped with a glow plug system, the preglow period being controlled automatically in line with the coolant temperature and outside tempera ture.

The preglow indicator light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on.

You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.

 You should start the engine immediately after the glow plug warning light has gone out.

  The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if the engine is at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5 °C. This means that you can start the engine

right away

 Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.

 It is possible that the fuse on the diesel preglow system is defect if the engine still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary  page 186.

 Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.

Starting the engine after fuel tank has run dry

It may take longer than normal to start the engine after refuelling if the fuel tank has run completely dry - up to one minute. This is because the fuel system must first of all be filled while the attempting to start the engine.

Switching off the engine

– The engine can be switched off by turning the ignition key into position  page 86, fig. 95 .

WARNING

 

Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary - risk of accident!

The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater phys ical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because if you do not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.

Caution

you should not switch the engine off right away at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated for a lengthy period at high loads but should be allowed it to run at idling speed for about 2 minutes. This prevents any accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off.

Note

 The radiator fan may continue running for a further 10 minutes or so after the engine and the ignition have been switched off. The coolant fan may, however, also switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises because of an accumulation of heat in the engine or if the engine is warm and the engine compart ment is additionally heated by strong sunlight.

 This is why particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine compartment  page 158, “Working in the engine compartment”.

s33o.book Page 89 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Shifting (manual gearbox) Handbrake

Starting-off and Driving 89 Fig. 96 Shift pattern on models fitted with 5-speed manual gearbox

Shift into reverse only when the car is stationary. Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear in order to avoid any shift noises.

The reversing light will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the ignition is on.

WARNING Never engage the reverse gear when driving - risk of accident!

Note

 One should not lay the hand on the shift lever while driving the vehicle. The pressure of the hand will be transferred to the gearshift forks in the gearbox. This can, over a period of time, lead to early wear of the gearshift forks.

 Depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gears, in order to avoid unneces sary wear and damage.

Fig. 97 Centre console: Handbrake Applying the handbrake

– Pull the handbrake lever up fully.

Releasing the handbrake

– Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and

at the same time

press in the locking button  fig. 97 .

– Hold the button pressed and push the handbrake lever down fully  .

The handbrake warning light the ignition is on.

 lights up when the handbrake is applied, provided A warning signal sounds and the following text appears in the display if you have inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied:

Release parking brake! .

The handbrake warning is activated if you drive at a speed of more than 6 km/h for more than 3 seconds.

WARNING



Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating which will have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system - risk of accident! In addition this can result in premature wear of the rear brake pads.



Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The children might, for example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The vehicle might then move off - risk of accident!

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 90 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

90 Starting-off and Driving Caution

After the car has come to a stop, always first of all apply the handbrake firmly before then additionally engaging a gear (manual gearbox) or moving the selector lever into position

(automatic gearbox).

Parking aid

The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles behind the vehicle.

Fig. 98 Parking aid: Range of sensors

The audible parking aid determines the distance between the rear bumper and an obstacle located behind the vehicle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The sensors are integrated in the rear bumper.

Range of sensors

The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle (area A  fig. 98 ). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced.

A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm (area A ) - danger area.

You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds!

extended through an installed detachable towing device.

If the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted towing device, the indication threshold of the danger area starts - continuous tone - 5 cm further behind the vehicle. The vehicle can be In some radio navigation systems and car radios, the distance to the obstacle can be shown graphically in the display. On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer. The driver is informed about this by a graphic display (vehicle towing a trailer) in the radio or the navigation radio system display. In some factory fitted radios or radio navigation systems, you can configure the system to reduce the playback volume when the parking aid is active, see the owner's manual for the radio or radio navigation system. This makes it easier to hear the parking aid.

Activating

The parking aid is activated automatically when

reverse gear

is engaged and the ignition is turned on. This is confirmed by a brief acoustic signal.

Deactivating

The parking aid is deactivated by disengaging the reverse gear or by switching the ignition off.

WARNING



The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when parking the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.



You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., behind your vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the sensors.



aid.

Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the parking Note

 The parking aid does not operate if you are towing a trailer (applies to models which feature a factory-fitted towing device).

 A system fault is indicated if a warning signal sounds for about 5 seconds after switching the ignition on and engaging reverse gear and there is no obstacle close to your vehicle. It is possible that the audible warning does not function correctly (an obstacle behind the vehicle may not be detected - take extra care). Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.

 If the audible warning sounds for 3 seconds after switching the ignition on and engaging the reverse gear, a fault has occured in the system. It is possible that the audible warning does not function correctly (an obstacle behind the vehicle may not be detected - take extra care). Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.

 The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to operate properly.

 If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in the position move).

A , warning signal indicates interruption (vehicle can no longer

s33o.book Page 91 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Starting-off and Driving 91

Cruise control system (CCS)

Introduction

The cruise control system (CCS) maintains a constant speed, more than 30 km/h (20 mph), once it has been set, without you having to depress the accelerator pedal. This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine. The cruise control system makes it possible - particu larly on long journeys - for you to rest your “accelerator foot”.

WARNING



For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads, loose gravel) - risk of accident!



In order to prevent unintentional use of the cruise control system, always switch off the system after use.

Note

 Models fitted with a manual gearbox: Always depress the clutch pedal if you switch on the cruise control system when the gearbox is in Neutral! Otherwise the engine can rev up unintentionally.

 The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving on steep downhill sections. The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels. One should shift down in good time to a lower gear or slow the vehicle down by applying the foot brake.

 It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position

Storing a speed

Fig. 99 Operating lever: Rocker button and switch of the cruise control system

The cruise control system is operated by means of the switch button A in the left lever of the multi-functional switch.

A and the rocker – Press the switch A  fig. 99 into the position

– After the desired speed has been reached, press the rocker button

SET-

position - the current speed is stored.

A into the After you have released the rocker button you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator.

A out of the position

SET-

, the speed You can

increase

the speed by depressing the accelerator. Releasing the acceler ator will cause the speed to

drop

again to the set speed.

This does not apply, however, if you drive at a speed which is more than 10 km/h higher than the saved speed for a period of more than 5 minutes. The stored speed will be cancelled in the memory. You then have to re-store the desired speed.

One can

reduce

the speed in the usual manner. The system is switched off tempo rarily by actuating the brake or clutch pedal  page 92.

WARNING First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that moment before resuming the stored speed.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 92 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

92 Starting-off and Driving

Changing a stored speed

You can also change the speed of the vehicle without depressing the accelerator.

Faster

– You can

increase

the stored speed without depressing the accelerator, by pressing the rocker button A  page 91, fig. 99 into the

RES+

position.

– The speed of the car will increase continuously if you hold the rocker button pressed in the

RES+

position. Once the car has reached the desired speed, release the rocker button. The set speed is then stored in the memory.

Slower

– You can

decrease

the stored speed by pressing the rocker button position.

A in the

SET-

– Holding down the pushbutton pressed in the

SET-

position will cause the speed of the vehicle to reduce continuously. Once the car has reached the desired speed, release the rocker button. The set speed is then stored in the memory.

– If you release the rocker button when the car is travelling at a speed of less than 30 km/h, the speed is not stored, the memory is erased. It is then necessary to again store the speed with the rocker button A in the position increase in speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km/hour.

SET-

after an

Switching off the cruise control system temporarily

– You can

switch off

the cruise control system with the brake pedal.

temporarily

by depressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal, on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox only – You can switch off temporarily the cruise control system, if you press the switch A in the middle position.

The set speed remains stored in the memory.

The

Resumption

of the stored speed is achieved by releasing the brake or clutch pedal, on vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox only after releasing the brake pedal and after shortly pressing the rocker button position

RES+

A  page 91, fig. 99 into the

WARNING First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that moment before resuming the stored speed.

Switching off the cruise control system completely

– Press the switch A  page 91, fig. 99 to the right into position

OFF

“START-STOP”

Fig. 100 Centre console: Button for the START-STOP system

The “START-STOP” system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing exhaust pollutants and CO 2 emissions.

The system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on.

The system switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill, such as while waiting at a traffic light.

Information regarding the current state of the “START-STOP” system is indicated in the display of the instrument cluster.

Automatic engine shut down (stop phase)

– Bring the vehicle to a stop (apply the handbrake, if necessary).

– Take the vehicle out of gear.

– Release the clutch pedal.

Automatic engine start (start phase)

– Depress the clutch pedal.

s33o.book Page 93 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Activating and deactivating the “START-STOP” system

You can deactivate and reactivate the “START-STOP” system by pressing the button  page 92, fig. 100 .

If the system is deactivated, the warning light lights up in the button.

If the vehicle is in the stop phase when pressing the button, the engine starts immediately.

The START-STOP system involves complicated switching conditions, some of them cannot be correctly determined without servicing. The general conditions for the proper functioning of the START-STOP system are listed in the following overview.

Conditions for the automatic engine shut down (stop phase)

Gearshift lever in the neutral position Clutch pedal not depressed The driver has fastened the seat belt The driver's door is closed The bonnet is closed The vehicle is stationary The factory-fitted towing device is not electrically connected to a trailer The engine operating temperature is reached The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient Slope angle/gradient of the vehicle must not be too great Engine speed is lower than 1200 rpm The temperature inside the vehicle battery is not too low or too high The pressure in the brake system is sufficient The difference between set and actual temperature in the interior is not too great The vehicle has exceeded the speed of 3 km/h since the last automatic start No cleaning cycle is active in the diesel particle filter  page 31 The front wheels are not turned excessively (the steering angle is less than 3/4 of a steering wheel revolution)

Starting-off and Driving 93 Conditions that enable an automatic engine start (start phase)

The clutch pedal is pressed The temperature setting is changed to min./max.

Defrosting windscreen is switched on High blower speed is set Button for the START-STOP system is pressed

Conditions that enable an automatic engine start without driver intervention

The vehicle moves at a speed of more than 3 km/h The difference between the set and the actual temperature in the interior is too great The battery voltage is too low The pressure in the brake system is not sufficient

Messages in the instrument cluster (valid for vehicles without information display) ERROR START STOP START STOP NOT POSSIBLE START STOP ACTIVE SWITCH OFF IGNITION START MANUALLY

Error in the START-STOP system Automatic engine shut down is not pos sible Automatic engine shut down (stop phase) Switch off the ignition Start the engine manually

WARNING



If the engine is switched off, neither the brake booster nor the electrohy draulic power steering operates.



Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 94 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

94 Starting-off and Driving Caution

If the “START-STOP” system is used at very high outside temperatures over a longer period of time, the vehicle battery can be damaged.

Note

 A change in ambient temperature can affect the temperature inside the battery with several hours delay. For example, if the vehicle is standing outside for a long period of time at a temperature below freezing or is in direct sunlight, it may take several hours until the temperature inside the battery reaches the appropriate temperature for the START-STOP system.

 In some cases, it is necessary to manually start the engine using the key (for example, if the driver's seat belt is not fastened or if the driver door is open for a period of more than 30 seconds during the stop phase). Pay attention to the rele vant messages in the instrument cluster.

 If the Climatronic is switched into the automatic mode, this may in certain circumstances prevent the automatic engine shut down.

s33o.book Page 95 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Automatic gearbox 95

Automatic gearbox Automatic gearbox

Information for driving with the 6-speed automatic gearbox

The maximum speed is reached in the 5th gear. The 6th gear serves as an economic driving programme, which is intended to reduce the fuel consumption. Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically. You can also, however, switch the gearbox over into the

Tiptronic mode

. This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually  page 98.

Starting-off and Driving

– Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.

– Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever), move the selector lever into the desired position, e.g.

 page 96, and then release the Shiftlock button.

– Wait a moment until the gearbox has shifted (a slight engagement nudge can be felt).

– Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator  .

Stop

– The selector lever position

does not have to be selected when stopping just for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is sufficient to hold the vehicle stationary using the foot brake. The engine can, however, be allowed just to idle.

Parking

– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.

– Apply the handbrake firmly.

– Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to

and then release the Shiftlock button.

The engine can only be the position

starting the engine:

started

when the selector lever is in position

Move selector lever to position P/N! P

. The following message is shown in the information display if the selector lever is not in , when locking the steering, switching the ignition on/off or when or in the instrument cluster display 

P/N

It is sufficient to engage selector lever position the selector lever into position selector lever out of position position

P P P

message appears in the information display

when parking on a flat surface. When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then move . This is to ensure that there is no excessive pres sure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move the . If the selector lever is not in position

when opening the driver's door and when the ignition is switched off, or when it is not in when switching off the ignition when the door is open, the following

Move selector lever to position P!

or in the instrument cluster display 

. The message disappears after a few seconds by switching on the ignition or by moving the selector lever into the position

If the selector lever position

is selected by accident while driving it is first neces sary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.

WARNING



Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident!



Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an accident!



When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever (except P and N) since the power transmission is never completely interrupted, also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle creeps.

Information for driving with the automatic gearbox DSG

The abbreviation DSG means Direct shift gearbox (Direct shift gearbox).

Two independent clutches are needed for the power transmission between the engine and the gearbox. These replace the torque converter of the conventional automatic gearbox. Their shifting is matched in such a way that there are no jerks when shifting the gear and the power transmission of the engine to the front wheels is not interrupted. Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically. You can also, however, switch the gearbox over into the

Tiptronic mode

. This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually  page 98.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 96 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

96 Automatic gearbox Starting-off and Driving

– Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.

– Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever), move the selector lever into the desired position, e.g. in

, and then release the Shiftlock button.

– Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator  .

Stop

– The selector lever position

does not have to be selected when stopping just for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is absolutely sufficient to hold the stopped vehicle stationary by depressing the foot brake. The engine can, however, be allowed just to idle.

Parking

– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.

– Apply the handbrake firmly.

– Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to

and then release the Shiftlock button.

The engine can only be the position

starting the engine:

started

when the selector lever is in position

Move selector lever to position P/N! P

. The following message is shown in the information display if the selector lever is not in , when locking the steering, switching the ignition on/off or when or in the instrument cluster display 

P/N

. At temperatures below -10 °C the engine can only be started in the selector lever position

It is sufficient to engage selector lever position the selector lever into position selector lever out of position position

P P P

message appears in the information display

when opening the driver's door and when the ignition is switched off, or when it is not in when switching off the ignition when the door is open, the following

Move selector lever to position P!

or in the instrument cluster display 

. The message disappears after a few seconds by switching on the ignition or by moving the selector lever into the position

If the selector lever position



WARNING Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident!



Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an accident!



If you are stopping at a hill (downhill section), never try to hold the car stationary with the gear engaged by means of the “accelerator”, this means by letting the clutch slip. This can lead to overheating of the clutch. If there were a risk of overheating of the clutch due to an overload, the clutch would open auto matically and the vehicle would move backwards - danger of accident!



If you must stop at a slope, depress and hold the brake pedal, so that you can prevent the vehicle from rolling back.

Caution

 The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload protection. If you make use of the uphill function on a vehicle which is stationary or driving slowly uphill, it will result in an increase of thermal stress of the clutches.

 In the event that they overheat, the warning light in the information display  switch off the engine and wait until the warning light and the warning go out - risk of gearbox damage! You can continue the trip as soon as the warning light and the warning go out.

 and a warning text appears page 23. In such a case bring the vehicle to a stop,

Selector lever positions

Fig. 101 Selector lever/information display: Selector lever positions

The selector lever position you have engaged is shown in the information display of the instrument cluster with the corresponding gear symbol highlighted  fig. 101 -

s33o.book Page 97 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Automatic gearbox 97

on the right. In the positions

and

the gear you have already engaged will be additionally displayed on the display.

- Parklock

The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.

The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary  .

If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, you must press the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the same time depress the brake pedal.

- Reverse gear

Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine idling  .

The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions

When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position

, the reverse lights will come on.

- Neutral

The transmission is in Neutral in this position.

The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer than 2 seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position

into the position

, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at less than 5 km/hour or on a stationary vehicle.

- Position for driving forward

When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are shifted up and down automatically in line with engine load, vehicle speed and the dynamic shift programme.

You must depress the brake pedal if you wish to move into position

from

when the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km/hour or is stationary  .

In certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountainous regions or when towing a trailer) it may be beneficial to select the manual shift programme  page 98 for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manually to the driving situations.

- Position for sporty style of driving

Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power potential of the engine. The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds as in the position

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

The gearbox does not shift into the 6th gear in the position

, because the maximum speed is reached with the 5th gear 6) .

The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selector lever out of the position

into the position

WARNING



Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an accident!



You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle (e.g. by hand from the engine compartment) if a drive position is engaged when the car is stationary. The vehicle would otherwise immediately start off - also when the handbrake is firmly applied - risk of an accident!



You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly apply the hand brake first before you or any other person opens the bonnet and starts working on the engine when it is running - risk of accident! It is also essential to observe all warnings



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment”.

Selector lever lock

Automatic selector lever lock

 With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions You must first of all depress the brake pedal in order to move the selector lever out of this position. The warning light   page 29 lights up in the instrument cluster as a reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in the positions

P P

and and

. A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when rapidly switching over the position in the

N N

(e.g. from

). This does, for example, allow one to seesaw out a stuck vehicle. The selector lever lock will click into place if the lever is position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being pressed.

The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed of less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into position

when the car is travelling at a higher speed.

6) Not valid for vehicles with automatic gearbox DSG.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 98 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

98 Automatic gearbox Shiftlock button

The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever positions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever lock is cancelled when you press the Shiftlock button.

Keylock 7) - Ignition key withdrawal lock

You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selector lever is in position

. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the selector lever is blocked in position

Kickdown function

The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration power.

Fully depressing the accelerator pedal allows the kickdown function to be activated in the desired driving program. This function has precedence over the driving programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting the maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the current selector lever position ( revolutions for this gear range.

Tiptronic

). The gearbox shifts down to one or several gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates. The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum

WARNING Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the driven wheels spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface - risk of skidding!

Dynamic shift programme

The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre-defined driving programmes.

Adopting a

moderate style of driving

will cause the gearbox to select the most economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible and shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel consumption.

Adopting a

sporty style of driving

with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in speed, exploiting the top speed of the car or depressing the accelerator pedal (kickdown function), will cause the gearbox to switch over to this style of driving and shift down earlier with frequent changes in gears in comparison to the moderate style of driving.

Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driving is a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however, possible to switch or shift down into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rapidly. The gearbox shifts down into a lower gear matching the speed of the car and this allows you to accelerate rapidly (e.g. when overtaking) without having to depress the accelerator pedal fully into the kickdown range. The original programme will be reactivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up again.

When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negoti ating an uphill stretch. When driving downhill, it is possible to shift down into the Tiptronic position, in order to exploit the engine brake torque.

Tiptronic

The Tiptronic allows the driver to also shift gears manually.

Fig. 102 Selector lever: manual shifting/large information display: Manual shifting of gears

The selector lever position you have engaged is indicated in the information display of the instrument cluster together with the engaged gear  fig. 102 on the right.

Switching over to manual shifting

– Push the selector lever to the right out of position

. After switching over, the current engaged gear is indicated in the display.

7) Only valid for some countries.

s33o.book Page 99 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Shifting up gears

– One-touch forward of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position)  fig. 102 A .

page 98,

Shifting down gears

– One-touch back of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position) A .

It is possible to switch over to manual both when the car is stationary and also when driving.

When you accelerate, the gearbox shifts up automatically into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automatic gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving.

If you operate the kickdown function, the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line with the vehicle speed and engine speed.

Manual shifting on the multifunction steering wheel

Fig. 103 Multifunction steering wheel: Manual shifting of gears Switching over to manual shifting

– Push the selector lever to the right out of position

. After switching over, the current engaged gear is indicated in the display.

Shifting up gears

– Press the right rocker switch  fig. 103 for the multifunction steering wheel.

Automatic gearbox 99 Shifting down gears

– Press the left rocker switch  fig. 103 for the multifunction steering wheel.

Temporarily switching over to manual shifting

– If the selector lever is in position +

, press the left rocker switch or the right rocker switch for the multifunction steering wheel.

– If the rocker switches or are not pressed for some time, manual shifting switches off. You can also disable the temporary switch over to manual shifting by pressing the right rocker switch for more than 1 second.

Emergency programme

An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system.

The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are func tional faults in the gearbox electronics. This is indicated by all of the segments in the display lighting up or going out.

A functional fault can have the following effect:    The gearbox only shifts into certain gears.

The reverse gear

cannot be used.

The manual shift programme (Tiptronic) is switched off in the emergency mode.

If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode, drive to the nearest specialist garage in order to have the fault rectified.

Selector lever-emergency unlocking

Fig. 104 Selector lever-emergency unlocking Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 100 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

100 Automatic gearbox

In case of interruption of the power supply (e.g. flat vehicle battery, defective fuse) or defect of the selector lever lock, the selector lever can no longer be shifted from the position

in the normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved. The selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency.

– Apply the handbrake firmly.

– Carefully pull up the front left and right cover.

– Pull up rear cover.

– Use the finger to press the yellow plastic part downwards  page 99, fig. 104 .

– Simultaneously press the shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and shift the lever into the position

(if the selector lever is shifted again into the position

, it is once again blocked).

s33o.book Page 101 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Communication 101

Communication Multifunction steering wheel

Operate radio und radio navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel

The buttons for setting the basic functions of the factory-fitted radio and naviga tion system are located on the multifunction steering wheel  fig. 105 .

You can of course continue to operate the radio and radio navigation from the unit. You will find a description in the relevant Owner's manual.

If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are also illuminated except the symbols  and  .

By pressing or turning the buttons, you can carry out the following functions.

Fig. 105 Multifunction steering wheel: control buttons Button

A A A A A A

Action

press briefly a) press for a long period of time a)  turn upwards  turn down wards  press briefly  press button for a long time  press briefly  press button for a long time

Radio, traffic information

Switch off/on tone Swich the unit on/off Increase volume Decrease volume Changing to the next stored radio station Changing to the next stored traffic information Interrupting the traffic report Interruption of the traffic report Changing to the previously stored radio station Changing to the previously stored traffic information Interrupting the traffic report Interruption of the traffic report

CD/MP3/Navigation

Changing to the next title fast forward Changing to the previous title fast rewind

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 102 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

102 Communication

a) On vehicles which are equipped with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II, pressing the button A only allows to operate the telephone.

The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or radio navigation system.

Note

The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio and radio navigation system of 4x 20°W.

WARNING (continued)

 

Please concentrate fully at all times on your driving!

You must not install two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts on the covers of the airbags or within the immediate deployment range of airbags. This might result in injuries to the occupants in the event of an accident.



Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in another area, from which it can be thrown during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an accident or a collision. In this case, the occupants of the vehicle might be injured.

Mobile phones and two-way radio systems

The installation of a mobile phone and two-way radio system in a vehicle should be carried out by a specialist garage.

Škoda Auto permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up to 10 watts.

It is essential that you inform a specialist garage about the possibilites to assemble and operate mobile phones and two-way radio sets which have a power output of more than 10 W. They will inform you which technical possibilities exist for retrofit ting mobile phones.

When using a mobile phone inside the vehicle, which is not inserted into the phone adapter, and thus has no connection to the external aerial, the electromagnetic radiation can exceed the current limit value. If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone exclusively in the adapter so that the radia tion in the vehicle drops to a minimum. This also improves the quality of the connec tion.

Operation of mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with func tioning of the electronic systems of your vehicle. The reasons for this may be:    no external aerial, external aerial incorrectly installed, transmission power greater than 10 watts.

Note

Observe the country-specific regulations for the use of mobile phones in vehicles.

Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II

Introduction

The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II is a built-in “hands-free system”, it provides a voice operated convenience mode via the multifunction steering wheel or the radio navigation system.

All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your vehicle can only be established with the help of the Bluetooth external aerial of the vehicle.

® technology. The adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to the To ensure an optimum signal transmission, always leave the telephone with the adapter in the telephone cradle.

Furthermore the volume can be changed individually during the call at any time with the button for setting the radio or radio navigation system or with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

WARNING



If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in the vehicle without using a external aerial or an external aerial which has been incorrectly installed, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field in the inte rior of the vehicle.

WARNING Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are fully respon sible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent, so that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time.

s33o.book Page 103 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Communication 103 Note

 Please refer to the following guidelines  way radio systems”.

page 102, “Mobile phones and two  Should you have any questions, please contact an authorised Škoda Service Partner.

Phone Phonebook

A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice control. In the phone phonebook there are 2 500 free memory locations available. Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers. This phone phonebook can be used in line with the mobile telephone.

After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the phone book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit.

Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-free system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating can take a few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored after the last update was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone numbers are only shown after the updating has ended.

If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500, the phone book is not complete.

If a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, dialogue of the voice control) occurs during the updating procedure, the updating is interrupted. After the tele phone event has ended, the updating starts anew.

Connection of the mobile phone with the hands-free system

In order to connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to connect the telephone to the hands-free system. Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone. The following steps must be carried out for the connection: – Activate the Bluetooth ® in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile phone.

– Switch on the ignition.

– In the information display, choose the menu

Phone

Phone search

and wait until the control unit has ended the search.

– Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.

– Confirm the PIN (as standard

1234

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

– If the hands-free system announces (as standard

SKODA_BT

) on the display of the mobile phone, enter the PIN (as standard

1234

) within 30 seconds and wait until the connection is established 8) .

– After ending the connection, confirm in the information display that a new user profile was created.

If no more free space is available for creating a new user profile, delete an existing user profile.

If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free system within 3 minutes after switching on the ignition, switch the ignition off and then again on. The visibility of the hands-free system is established again for 3 minutes. The visibility of the Bluetooth ® device is automatically switched off if the vehicle starts off or if the mobile phone connects to the device.

During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected with the hands-free system.

Up to four mobile phones can be paired to the hands-free system, whereby only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system.

Connection with an already paired mobile phone

After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone 8) . Check on the mobile unit if the automatic connection was established.

Disconnecting the connection

 By withdrawing the ignition key.

  By disconnecting the device in the information display.

By disconnecting the device in the mobile phone.

Solving connection problems

   When the system reports

No paired phone found

, check the operating state of the phone:   Is the telephone switched on?

Is the PIN code entered?

Is Bluetooth ® active?

Is the visibility of the mobile phone active?

Was the telephone already paired with the hands-free system?

8) Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorization for establishing a Bluetooth it must always be performed when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.

® connection is performed via the input of a code. If the input for the authorization is necessary,

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 104 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

104 Communication WARNING In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth ® function of the hands-free system must be switched off by a specialist garage!

Note

 Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via Bluetooth with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II.

® . You can ask at an authorised Škoda Service Partner if your telephone is compatible  If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone exclusively in the adapter so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum.

 Inserting the mobile phone into the adapter ensures an optimal sending and receiving power and offers at the same time the advantage of the battery charging.

 The range of the Bluetooth to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your mobile phone is e.g. in a jacket pocket, this can lead to difficulties when establishing the Bluetooth ® ® connection to the hands-free system is restricted connection with the hands-free system or the data transfer.

Inserting the mobile phone and adapter

– Insert the mobile phone into the adapter instructions).

A (as specified in manufacturer's

Removing the mobile phone and adapter

– Press simultaneously the side locks of the mount and remove the mobile phone and adapter  fig. 106 .

Caution

Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interruption of the connection. When taking out the mobile phone, the connection to the factory-fitted antenna is interrupted, this reduces the quality of the transmitting and receiving signal. The charging of the mobile phone battery is also interrupted.

Operating telephone calls with the aid of the adapter.

Fig. 106 Universal preparation for the mobile phone

Only one telephone mount is factory-fitted. An adapter for the telephone can be purchased from the range of the Škoda original accessories.

Inserting the mobile phone and adapter

– First of all push the adapter position.

A in the direction of arrow  fig. 106 up to the stop into the mount. Press the adapter slightly downwards, until it locks securely into

Fig. 107 Illustration image: Single-button adapter/two-button adapter

Function overview of the button   Taking/ending a call  (PTT - “push to talk”) on the adapter  Activating/deactivating voice operation fig. 107 : Aside from the button SOS  fig. 107  (Emergency call) is dialed.

, the following button can be found on certain adapters - right. After pressing the button for 2 seconds, the number 112

Note

The adapters illustrated are only prime examples.

s33o.book Page 105 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Communication 105

Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel

Button Action

 press briefly  press button for a long time  turn upwards  turn downwards

Fig. 108 Multifunction steering wheel: Mobile phone operation

The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone  fig. 108 .

This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the telephone preinstalla tion at the factory.

If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are also illuminated except the symbols  and  .

Overview of the functions of the multifunction steering wheel with mobile phone operation:

Operation

Accept call, end call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of the dialed numbers, deactivate voice control Activating voice operation, rejecting a call Increase volume Decrease volume The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current telephone.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 106 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

106 Communication

Operate the telephone via the information display

In the menu

Phone

you can choose from the following menu items:       

Phone book Dial number

Call register Voice mailbox Bluetooth

Settings

10)

Back Phone book

In the menu point

Phone book

is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone.

Dial number

In the menu point

Dial number

, you can write any telephone number. Select in sequence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by pressing the handwheel. You can select the numbers the functions

Cancel, Call, Delete

0 - 9

, the symbols 



, #

and

Call register

In the menu point

Call register

, you can select the following menu points:   

Missed calls Dialled numbers Received calls Voice mailbox

In the menu

Voice mailbox

, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number 9) .

Bluetooth

In the menu

Bluetooth

you can select the following menu points:  

User

- the overview of the stored users

New user

- Search for new telephones which are in the reception range 9) 10) In vehicles equipped with the Amundsen+ radio navigation system, this function can be reached via the menu on the radio navigation system, see the Amundsen+ Owner's manual.

This function is not available in vehicles equipped with the Amundsen+ radio navigation sys tem.

 

Visibility

- Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices

Media player

 

Active device Paired devices



Search



Phone name

- the possibility to change the name of the telephone unit (pre-set SKODA_BT)

Settings

In the menu

Settings

you can select the following menu points:  

Phone book



Update

9) .



List

 

Surname First name Ring tone Back

Return in the basic menu of the telephone.

Voice control

Dialogue

The period, in which the telephone system is ready to receive voice commands and carry out the voice commands, is called DIALOGUE. The system gives audible feed back and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions.

Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on the following factors:

 Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation or excessive voice pauses.

  Avoid insufficient articulation.

exterior noise.

 Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop disturbing It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise.

s33o.book Page 107 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM  During the dialogue avoid additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simultaneously talking occupants.

  Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.

The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and directed to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front passenger can operate the equipment.

If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “ error the answer “

Cancelled Sorry?

” is given and the dialogue is ended.

” and a new entry can be performed. After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid. After the 3rd

Switch on voice control (dialogue)

You can start the dialog at any time:  by pressing the button  briefly on the adapter    by pressing the button page 105, fig. 108 ;  page 104, fig. 107 ; longer on the multi-function steering wheel

Switching off voice control (dialogue)

If the system is currently playing back a message, you will have to end the message currently being played back:   by pressing the button by pressing the button   briefly on the adapter; longer on the multi-function steering wheel.

If the system is expecting a voice command, you can end the dialog yourself:  with the command

CANCEL

;   by pressing the button by pressing the button   briefly on the adapter; longer on the multi-function steering wheel.

Note

When there is an incoming call, the dialog will be ended immediately.

Communication 107

Voice commands

Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit Voice command HELP CALL XYZ PHONE BOOK CALL HISTORY DIAL NUMBER REDIAL MUSIC

FURTHER OPTIONS SETTINGS Action

After this command the system repeats all possible commands.

With this command you call up the contact from the phone book  page 108.

After this command, for example the phone book can be repeated, a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc.

Lists of dialed numbers, missed calls etc.

After this command a phone number can be entered which establishes a connection to the requested party.

After this command the system selects the last selected number.

Play music from the mobile phone or another paired device.

After this command, the system offers other context based commands.

Selection for setting Bluetooth ® , dialogue etc.

CANCEL

The dialogue is ended.

a) In vehicles equipped with the Amundsen+ radio navigation system, this function can be reached via the menu on the radio navigation system, see the Amundsen+ Owner's manual.

After giving the command repeated by the system.

DIAL NUMBER

, the system requests the entry of a tele phone number. The telephone number can be entered as an interconnected spoken row of digits (complete number), in the form of order of digits (separation through a brief voice pause) or through individually spoken digits. After each order of digits (separation through brief voice pause) all of the digits detected up to now are The digits

0 - 9

, symbols

digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken digits (two, three).



, #

are permitted. The system detects no continuous

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 108 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

108 Communication

Call name

– Switch on the voice operation  page 107, “Switch on voice control (dialogue)”.

– Give the command

CALL XYZ

after the signal tone.

Example for calling the name from the phone book Voice command CALL XYZ

e.g.

WORK Announcement

“

Say home, work, mobile

” “

XYZ work is dialed.

”

Store voice recording of a contact

If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you can save an individual voice entry for this contact in the menu item

Phone book

Voice Tag

Record

You can also store your own voice entry using voice control in the menu

FURTHER OPTIONS

Music playback via Bluetooth

®

The universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl makes it possible to play back music via Bluetooth ® from the devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or notebook.

In order to enable the music playback via Bluetooth ® , it is necessary to connect the terminal device with the hands-free system in the menu

Phone

Bluetooth

Media player

The operation of the music playback from the connected device can be performed via the hands-free system with the voice control device.

 page 107, “Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit” or directly via the connected

Note

 The device to be connected must support the Bluetooth ® profile A2DP, see Owner's manual of the device to be connected.

 This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Blues car radio.

Inputs AUX-IN and MDI

The input AUX-IN is located below the armrest of the front seats and is marked with  .

The input MDI is located in the front below the front passenger storage compart ment.

The inputs AUX-IN and MDI connect the external audio sources (e. g. iPod or MP3 player) and playback music from these devices via your radio or factory-fitted car radio or radio navigation system.

The description of the operation can be found in the relevant Owner's Manual of your car radio or your radio navigation system.

Note

The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio and radio navigation system of 4x 20°W.

s33o.book Page 109 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Passive Safety 109

Safety

Passive Safety Basic information

Driving the safe way

Passive safety measures reduce the risk of injury in accident situa tions.

In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle. We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and safety of children. It is therefore important, in particular, to comply with the notes and warn ings in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those travelling with you.

WARNING



This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants. You will find further information on safety, which concerns you and those travelling with you, in the following chapters of this Owner's Manual.



The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.

       Front airbag for the driver and front passenger; Side airbags; Head airbags; anchoring points for child seat using the “ISOFIX” system; anchoring points for child seat using the “Top Tether” system; head restraints adjustable for height; adjustable steering column.

The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations. The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you, if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used.

For this reason you will be provided with information on why these equipment components are very important, how it protects you and the occupants, what should be observed when using the equipment and how you and the people travel ling with you can make full use of the existing safety equipment. This Owner's Manual contains important warning notes, which you and those travelling with you should pay attention to in order to reduce a risk of injury.

Safety concerns everybody!

Safety equipment

The safety equipment is part of the occupant protection and it can reduce the risk of injuries in accident situations.

    “Do not put at risk” your safety and the safety of those travelling with you . In the event of an accident, the safety equipment can reduce the risk of injuries. The following list contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle: three-point seat belts for all the seats; belt force limiters for front seats; belt tensioners for front seats; seat belt height adjusters for front seats;

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

Before setting off

The driver is always fully responsible for his occupants and for the operating safety of the vehicle.

For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please pay attention to the following points before setting off.

    Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly.

Inspect the tyre inflation pressure.

Ensure that all the windows offer a good visibility to the outside.

Safely attach the items of luggage  ment”.

page 60, “Loading the luggage compart   Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedal.

Adjust the mirror, the front seat and the head restraint to match your body size.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 110 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

110 Passive Safety

 Point out to your occupants that the head restraints must be adjusted to match their body size.

  Protect the children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 125, “Transporting children safely”.

 Adopt the correct seated position  adopt the correct seated position.

page 110. Also inform your occupants to  Fasten the seat belt correctly. Also inform your occupants to properly fasten the seat belts  page 115, “How are seat belts correctly fastened?”.

What influences the driving safety?

The driving safety is primarily determined by the style of driving and the personal behaviour of all the occupants.

The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving safety is effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk. Please refer to the following guidelines.

 Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g. by your occupants or mobile phone calls.

 Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. through medication, alcohol, drugs.

  and weather conditions.

 Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.

Adjust the driving speed at all times to the road condition as well as to the traffic Take regular breaks on long journeys - at the latest every two hours.

Correct seated position

Correct seated position for the driver

Correct seated position for the driver is important for safe and relaxed driving.

Fig. 109 The correct distance of the driver from the steering wheel/The correct head restraint adjustment for the driver

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following setting.

 Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm  fig. 109 - left.

 Position the driver seat in the forward/back direction so that you are able to fully press the pedals with your legs at a slight angle.

 Adjust the seat backrest so that you are able to reach the highest point of the steering wheel with your arms at a slight angle.

 Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head  fig. 109 - right.

 Fasten the seat belt correctly  fastened?”.

page 115, “How are seat belts correctly Driver seat adjustment   page 56, “Adjusting the front seats - Variant 1” or page 57, “Adjusting the front seats - Variant 2”.

WARNING



The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be

s33o.book Page 111 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Passive Safety 111 WARNING (continued) correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants.

 

The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel page 110, fig. 109 . Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!



The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk of injury!



Correct seated position for the front passenger

The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the dash panel so that the airbag offers him the greatest possible safety it is deployed.

For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following setting.

   Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible to the rear.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head Fasten the seat belt correctly  fastened?”.

 page 110, fig. 109 - right.

page 115, “How are seat belts correctly In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated  “Deactivating airbags”.

page 123, Adjusting the passenger seat  page 56, “Adjusting the front seats - Variant 1”.

WARNING



The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be Using the system Safety Driving Tips WARNING (continued) correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants.



panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!



The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!



The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk of injury!

Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats

Occupants on the rear seats must sit upright, keep the feet in the footwell and must have their seat belts correctly fastened.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an acci dent, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.

 Adjust the head restraints so that the top edge of the head restraints is at the same level as the upper part of your head  page 110, fig. 109 - on the right.

 Fasten the seat belt correctly  fastened?”.

page 115, “How are seat belts correctly  If you are transporting  page 125, “Transporting children safely” children in the vehicle, please use a suitable child restraint system.

WARNING



The head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size, in order to offer an optimal protection for you and your occupants.



Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never put your feet out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If the head airbag is deployed and when adopting an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to an increased risk of injury and in the event of an accident you may suffer fatal injuries!

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 112 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

112 Passive Safety WARNING (continued)



If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.

Examples of an incorrect seated position

An incorrect seated position can lead to severe injuries or death for the occupants.

Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective func tions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt. The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants, in particular for the children. Do not permit an occupant to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving.

The following list contains the examples of seated positions which are dangerous for the occupants. This list is not complete, however we would like you to get inter ested in this subject.

Therefore, while the car is moving never:                stand up in the vehicle; stand up on the seats; kneel on the seats; tilt the seat backrest fully to the back; lean against the dash panel; lie on the rear seat bench; only sit on the front area of the seat; sit to the side; lean out of the window; put the feet out of the window; put the feet on the dash panel; put the feet on the seat upholstery; transport somebody in the footwell; have the seat belt not fastened when driving; occupy the luggage compartment.

WARNING



If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to life threatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.



Before setting off, please adopt the correct seated position and do not change this seated position while the car is moving. Also advise your occupants to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this seated position while the car is moving.

s33o.book Page 113 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Seat belts 113

Seat belts Why seat belts?

WARNING (continued)



It is important for the belt webbing to be properly routed if the seat belts are to offer the maximum protection. You can see a description of how safety belts should be fitted properly on the next pages.

Note

Please comply with any differing legal requirements when using the seat belts.

The physical principle of a frontal collision

Fig. 110 Driver wearing seat belt

It is a proven fact that seat belts offer good protection in accidents  wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most countries.

fig. 110 . Thus Seat belts which have been correctly fastened and adjusted hold the occupants of the car in the correct seated position  in turn, may well result in severe injuries.

fig. 110 . The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy to a considerable extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt, profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optimally absorbed by the seat belts. The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety measures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy. The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury.

Accident statistics prove that seat belts which are fastened and properly adjusted reduce the risk of an injury and enhance the chance of survival in a major accident  page 113.

It is important that you pay attention to safety measures, particularly when trans porting children in the vehicle  page 125, “Transporting children safely”.

WARNING



Fasten your seat belt each time before setting off - also when driving in town! This also applies to the people seated at the rear - risk of injury!



Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child point seat belts”.



page 115, “Fastening three Using the system Safety Driving Tips Fig. 111 The driver is catapulted forward if not wearing a belt/The rear seat occupant is cata pulted forward if not wearing a belt

The physical principle of a frontal accident can be explained quite simply: Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants. The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle and the occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase, the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident.

The speed of the vehicle is, nevertheless, the most important factor. Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy four times.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 114 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

114 Seat belts

The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident with your hands, is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.

Even if you only drive at a speed within the range from 30 km/hour to 50 km/hour, the forces which are produced on your body in the event of an accident can easily exceed 10.000 N (Newton). This equals a weight of one tonne (1 000 kg).

In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the vehicle not wearing a seat belt, are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the vehicle, such as steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen, thrown out of the vehicle. This can result in fatal injuries.

 page 113, fig. 111 - left. The occupants of a vehicle who have not fastened their seat belts may even be It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated at the front  page 113, fig. 111 - right.

Important safety information regarding the use of seat belts

The correct use of the seat belts considerably reduces the risk of injury!

WARNING



The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twisted, or chafe against any sharp edges.



It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts are to offer their maximum protection fastened?”.



page 115, “How are seat belts correctly



No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt together.



The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you are correctly seated



page 110, “Correct seated position”.



The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. spectacles, ball-point pens, keys etc.) as this may be a cause of injuries.



Wearing a lot of layers or loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jacket) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts.

WARNING (continued)



It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e. g. for shortening the seat belts for smaller persons).



The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to protect and the risk of injury increases.



The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.



The three-point seat belt for the rear seats can only fulfil its function reliably when the backrests are correctly locked into position



page 59.



The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may impair proper operation of the inertia reel



page 154, “Seat belts”.



The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or similar objects otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly.



Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition. If you find seat belts which have damage to the seat belt, seat belt connections, to the inertia reels or to the lock, the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage.



The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not make an attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.



Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is best done by a specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected. The anchorage points for the seat belts should also be checked.



In certain countries it is possible to use seat belts which differ in terms of their operation from the seat belts which are described on the pages which follow.

Note

The vehicles of the category N1 are not equipped with the middle seat belt on the rear seats. The vehicle is only approved for four persons.

s33o.book Page 115 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Seat belts 115

How are seat belts correctly fastened?

Fastening three-point seat belts

Fasten your seat belt before starting!

Fig. 112 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother

– Correctly adjust the front seat and the head restraint before fastening your seat belt  page 110, “Correct seated position”.

– Slowly pull the belt webbing at the tongue of the lock over your chest and pelvis  .

– Insert the tongue of the lock into the seat belt buckle belonging to the seat until it is heard to lock in place.

– Pull on the seat belt to check that it has also reliably engaged in the lock.

Each three-point seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. This inertia reel offers you complete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly. If the brakes are applied suddenly, the inertia reel will block. The seat belts also block when the car accelerates, when driving downhill and when cornering.

Expectant mothers must also wear the seat belt  .

WARNING



The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across your neck but must run approximately over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. The lap part of the belt must run across the hip and must never be routed across the stomach. It must always fit snugly webbing as required.



fig. 112 - left. Adjust the belt WARNING (continued)



The lap part of the belt should be positioned as low as possible at the pelvis of an expectant mother in order to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen



fig. 112 - right.



Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents.



A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the seat belt.



Only insert the lock tongue into the lock which is the correct one for your seat. This will affect the protection which the belt offers and increase the risk of an injury.

Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats

Fig. 113 Front seat: Seat belt height adjuster

The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible for you to adapt the routing of the front three-point seat belt in the area of the shoulder to match your body size.

– To adjust the belt height press the height adjuster and move it up or down  fig. 113 .

– Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly locked in place.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 116 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

116 Seat belts WARNING Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the seat belt is positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder - on no account across your neck.

Note

It is also possible to adapt the routing of the belt webbing at the front seats by adjusting the height of the seat.

Taking seat belts off

Fig. 114 Releasing lock tongue from belt lock

– Press the red button in the belt lock  tongue of the lock to jump out.

fig. 114 . The spring force causes the – Guide the seat belt back with your hand to enable the inertia reel to wind up the belt webbing more easily.

A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of.

Belt tensioner

Safety for the driver and front passenger

wearing their seat belts

is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat belts.

The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal colli sion of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened.

The fastened three-point seat belt is automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal or side collision of a certain severity.

Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions, side and rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front.

WARNING



Any work on the belt tightener system, including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried out by a specialist garage.



The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace the entire system.



The dealer must hand over this Owner's manual to the new owner at the time of purchasing the vehicle.

Note

 Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an indi cation of a fire in the vehicle.

 It is essential to pay attention to relevant safety regulations if the vehicle or individual parts of the system are scrapped. Specialist garages are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed information in this respect.

 When disposing of vehicle or parts of the system, it is important to comply with the national legal requirements.

s33o.book Page 117 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Airbag system 117

Airbag system Description of the airbag system

General information on the airbag system

The front airbag system is complementary to the three-point seat belts and offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and passenger in the event of a frontal collision.

In the event of a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to the occu pants to the part of their body facing the side of the accident.

The airbag system is only functional after the ignition has been switched on.

The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag warning light comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched on.

The airbag system (according to vehicle equipment) consists of:

 an electronic control unit;       the front airbags for the driver and front passenger  the side airbags  head airbags  page 120; page 121; an airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster  a front passenger airbag switch  the dash panel  page 123.

page 123; page 118; page 31; an indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag in the middle of

A fault in the airbag system exists if:

 the airbag indicator light does not light up when the ignition is switched on;  the airbag indicator light does not go out after about 3 seconds after the ignition is switched on;  the airbag indicator light goes out and comes on again after the ignition is switched on;   the airbag indicator light comes on or flickers when driving; the airbag indicator light showing a switched-off front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel flashes.

WARNING



To enable the occupants of a vehicle to be protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be “Correct seated position” correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occu pant.



page 110,



If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.



Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident.

  

No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.

It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed.

The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one acci dent. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.



The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.



If you sell your car, please hand over the complete vehicle documentation to the new owener. Please note that the documents relating to the possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag are also part of the vehicle documents!



If the vehicle or individual parts of the airbag system are scrapped, it is essential to observe the relevant safety precautions. The authorised Škoda Service Partners are familiar with these regulations.



When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important to comply with the national legal requirements.

When are the airbags deployed?

The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and front passenger airbag are deployed in the event of a

violent frontal collision

In the case of a

violent side crash

, the side airbag in the front seat and the head airbag on the side on which the collision occurs are deployed.

It is also possible under certain special accident situations that the front as well as the side airbags and head airbags are deployed simultaneously.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 118 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

118 Airbag system

The airbags

are not deployed

in the case of

minor

frontal and side collisions, rear end collisions, tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover.

Deployment factors

It is not possible to state globally which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation as the circumstances which exist in the case of accidents vary greatly. An important role in this case, for example, is played by factors such as the type of object against which the vehicle impacts (hard, soft), the angle of impact, the vehicle speed etc.

A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs during a collision. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the relevant restraint system. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is meas ured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.

The airbags are not deployed if:

 ignition is switched off;     a minor frontal collision; a minor side collision; a rear-end collision; Rollover of the vehicle.

Note

 A grey white or red, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.

 In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed:  the interior lighting comes on (if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position),    the hazard warning light is switched on; all the doors are unlocked; the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.

Front airbags

Description of the front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belt!

Fig. 115 Driver airbag in the steering wheel/front passenger airbag in the dash panel

The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel front airbag for the front passenger is housed in the dash panel above the storage compartment  fig. 115  fig. 115 - left. The - right. The installation positions are each marked with the “AIRBAG” logo.

The front airbag system, in combination with three-point safety belts, offers addi tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger in the event of a frontal collision of major severity  in “Important safety informa tion regarding the front airbag system” on page 119.

The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but is part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept.

Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a seat belt which is fastened

Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the

seat belts

is to also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event of a frontal collision so as to enable the front airbags to offer the maximum protection.

You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection  page 113, “Why seat belts?”.

Caution

The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been deployed.

s33o.book Page 119 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Function of the front airbags

Risk of injury to the head and chest area is reduced by fully inflated airbags.

Airbag system 119

Important safety information regarding the front airbag system

Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of injury!

Fig. 116 Inflated airbags

The airbag system is designed in such a way that the airbags for the driver and front passenger are deployed in the event of a violent frontal collision.

In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously deployed.

If the airbags are deployed, the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and inflated in front of the driver and front passenger  fig. 116 . The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident. The forward movement of the driver and of the front passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.

The specially developed airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag in a controlled manner (depending on the load of the particular car occupant) in order to cushion head and chest areas. The airbag then deflates subsequently to such an extent, after an accident, to again provide a clear view forward.

A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.

The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct  in “Important safety infor mation regarding the front airbag system”.

Fig. 117 Safe distance to steering wheel WARNING



Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident, the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!



For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel



fig. 117 . Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to prop erly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.



It is essential to always switch off



page 123, “Deactivating airbags” the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.



There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.



The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side must not be stuck onto, covered or modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth or a cloth moistened with water. No objects such as cup holders, mobile phone mounts, etc. may be Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 120 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

120 Airbag system WARNING (continued) attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within the immediate area.

 

No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system. Any work on the airbag system including installing and removing system compo nents because of other repair work (e.g. removing the steering wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.

Never carry out changes on the front bumper or on the body.



Never place any objects on the surface of the dash panel on the front passenger side.

You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection  page 113, “Why seat belts?”.

Function of the side airbags

Risk of injury to the upper part of the body is reduced by fully inflated side airbags.

Side airbags

Description of side airbags

The side airbag increases protection of the passenger concerned in the case of a side impact.

Fig. 118 Driver seat: Installation position of airbag

The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats and are marked with the lettering “AIRBAG”  fig. 118 on the middle part.

The side airbag system in combination with the three-point seat belts, offers addi tional protection for the upper area of the body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of the occupants of the vehicle in the event of severe side collisions  in “Important safety information on the side airbag” on page 121.

Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the

seat belts

is to also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event of a side collision so as to enable the side airbags to offer the maximum protection.

Fig. 119 Inflated side airbag

When the side airbags are deployed, the head airbag and the belt tensioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side .

In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously deployed.

If an airbag is deployed, the airbag is filled with gas. The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident  fig. 119 .

A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.

The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) is reduced on the side facing the door.

s33o.book Page 121 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Airbag system 121

Important safety information on the side airbag

Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of injury!

WARNING (continued)



Any work on the side airbag system including removing and installing system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing seats) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.

WARNING



It is essential to always switch off



regarding the use of child safety seats.

page 123, “Deactivating airbags” the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations



Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This applies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat



page 127, “Child safety and side airbag”.



If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This can result in serious injuries dren!”.



page 125, “What you should know about transporting chil-



There must not be any further persons, animals as well as objects positioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No accessories, such as a can holder, should be attached to the doors.



Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing.



Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!



Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by Škoda Auto. In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of non approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag.



Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired without delay by your specialist garage.



The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage, cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open the modules.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

Head airbags

Description of the head airbags

The head airbag together with the side airbag offers enhanced occupant protection in the event of a side collision.

Fig. 120 Installation position of the head airbags

The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the car  fig. 120 . The installation positions of the head airbags are each marked with the “AIRBAG” logo.

The head airbag together with the three-point seat belts and the side airbags, offers additional protection for the head and neck area of the occupants in the event of a side collision of major severity  in “Important safety information on the head airbag” on page 122.

Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the

seat belts

is to also hold the driver and the occupants in a correct seated position in the event of a side collision so as to enable the head airbags to offer the maximum protection.

You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection  page 113.

Together with other elements (such as cross bars in the doors, stable vehicle struc ture) the head airbags are the consequent further development of occupant protec tion in the case of side collisions.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 122 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

122 Airbag system

Function of the head airbags

The risk of injury to the head and neck area is reduced in the event of a side collision by fully inflated head airbags.

Fig. 121 Inflated head airbag

In the case of a

side collision

the head airbag is deployed together with the relevant side airbag  fig. 121 and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the acci dent occurs.

If the system is deployed, the airbag is filled with propellant gas and covers the entire area of the side window including the door pillars  fig. 121 .

The protection offered by the head airbags is thus available simultaneously both to the front occupants of the car seated on the side on which the collision occurs, as well as to the rear occupants. Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car, is cushioned by the inflated head airbag. The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area. The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar.

In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously deployed.

The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident. A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.

Important safety information on the head airbag

Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of injury!

WARNING



It is essential to always switch off seats.



page 123 the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety



There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.



Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing. In addition, it is not permitted to use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing.



The airbag control unit operates together with the sensors, which are attached in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must be carried out at the doors as well as at the door panels (for example additional installation of loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their panels must only be carried out by a specialist garage.



There must not be any other persons (e.g. children) or animals between the car occupant and the deployment area of the head airbag. In addition, none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driving, or extend their arms and hands out of the window.



The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deploy ment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed.



Installing impermissible accessories in the area of the head airbags may considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated, parts of the acces sories fitted may in certain circumstances be thrown into the interior of the car and cause injuries to the occupants



page 174.

s33o.book Page 123 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

WARNING (continued)



Any work on the head airbag system including installing and removing system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing headliner) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.

Deactivating airbags

If any airbags have been deactivated, switch them on again as soon as possible so that they are able to again provide their proper protection.

There is the technical means installed within your vehicle to switch off the front, side or head airbag (take out of commission).

This is why you should have the deactivation of the airbags carried out by a specialist garage.

On vehicles equipped with the switch for deactivation of the airbags, you can deac tivate the front passenger airbag by means of this switch  page 123.

Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances, such as if:

 where the child is seated with its back to the direction of travel (in some countries this must be in the direction of travel due to other legal regulations applying)   steering wheel and chest, despite the driver seat being correctly adjusted;  physical disability;  You must in

exceptional cases

use a child seat on the front passenger seat page 125, “Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats”; you are not able to maintain the distance of at least 25 cm between middle of special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a you have installed other seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags).

Monitoring the airbag system

The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one airbag has been switched off.

If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment:

 The airbag indicator light lights up for 3 seconds each time the ignition is switched on and then flashes after that for about 12 seconds.

Airbag system 123 If the airbag was switched off using the airbag switch on the side of the dash panel:

 each time the ignition is switched on;  the airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on for about 3 seconds switching off the airbag is indicated by the lighting up of the indicator light in the display      in the middle of the dash panel  fig. 122 - right.

Note

Your authorised Škoda Service Partner will be able to advise you whether national legislation in your country allows airbags in your vehicle to be deactivated, and which ones.

Switch for the front passenger airbag

Fig. 122 Switch for the front passenger airbag/indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag

Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the switch.

Deactivating an airbag

– Switch off the ignition.

– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the ignition key in the direction of the arrow to the position

OFF

 fig. 122 - left.

– Check whether the airbag indicator light in the display     the middle of the dash panel lights up when the ignition is switched on  fig. 122 - right.

 in

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 124 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

124 Airbag system Switching on an airbag

– Switch off the ignition.

– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the ignition key in the opposite direction of the arrow to the position

 page 123, fig. 122 - left.

– Check whether the airbag indicator light in the display the middle of the dash panel does not light up when the ignition is switched on  page 123, fig. 122 - right.

     in The airbag should only be switched off under exceptional circumstances  page 123.

Indicator light in display

    

(airbag switched off)

The airbag indicator light is located in the middle of the dash panel  fig. 122 - right.

page 123, If the airbag is

switched on

, the airbag indicator light comes on for a few seconds after switching on the ignition.

In cases where the front passenger airbag is second and then comes on again.

switched off

the airbag indicator light comes on for a few seconds after switching on the ignition, goes out for about a There is a system fault present in the airbag switch off  flashes.

if the indicator light

WARNING



off.

The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched



Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for the airbag deactivation.



If the warning light

 

(airbag switched off) flashes:



Front passenger airbag is not deployed in the event of an accident!



It is also important to have the system inspected without delay by a specialist garage.

s33o.book Page 125 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Transporting children safely 125

Transporting children safely What you should know about transporting children!

An introduction to the subject

Accident statistics have revealed that children are generally more safely transported on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat.

Children who are less than 1.50 m in height and who weigh less than 36 kg should, under normal circumstances, sit on the rear seat (take note of any national legal provisions which differ from this). They should be secured there by means of a child restraint system or by using the existing seat belts depending on their body size and weight. The child seat should be mounted behind the front passenger seat for safety reasons.

The physical principle of an accident does, of course, also apply to children  page 113, “The physical principle of a frontal collision”. They differ from adults in that their muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed. Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury.

Children should be transported by using special child safety seats in order to reduce this risk of injury.

Only use child safety seats which are officially approved, suitable for children and which comply with the standard ECE-R 44, which classifies child safety seats into 5 groups  page 127, “Classification of child seats into groups”. Child restraint systems which have been tested for conformity to ECE-R 44 standard have a non detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test number) attached to the seat.

We recommend that you use child safety seats from the Škoda genuine accessories. These child seats were developed and also tested for use in Škoda vehicles. They fulfil the ECE-R 44 standard.

WARNING Always comply with national legal provisions and instructions from the relevant child safety seat manufacturer when installing and using a child seat



in “Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats”.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips Note

National legal provisions, which deviate from the information contained in these operating instructions, take precedence over the information contained in the oper ating instructions.

Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats

Correct use of child safety seats considerably reduces the risk of injury!

WARNING



All the occupants of the car - in particular children - must wear a seat belt when the car is moving.



Children who are less than 1.50 m in height and who weigh less than 36 kg must not use a normal seat belt without a child restraint system, otherwise this may result in injuries to the stomach and neck areas. Comply with the national legal requirements.

 

One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.

You can transport a child safely in a suitable child safety seat



“Child seat”!

page 127,

 

Only one child may be fastened with a seat belt into a child safety seat.

Never leave the child sitting unattended in the seat.



Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life-threatening temperatures in the vehicle.



Never allow your child to be transported in a vehicle without the use of a suitable restraint system.



Children should also never stand up in a vehicle or kneel on the seats when the vehicle is moving. In the event of an accident the child will be thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries, and also injure other occupants.



Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat if the airbag system deploys in the event of an accident. This can result in severe or even fatal injuries.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 126 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

126 Transporting children safely WARNING (continued)



It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts are to offer their maximum protection fastened?”. Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manu facturer of the child safety seat regarding correct routing of the belt. Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents.



page 115, “How are seat belts correctly



Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly. One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings.



It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel of child safety seats.



page 123. If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use

Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat

Child safety seats should always be attached to the rear seats.

WARNING



Warning - particular hazard! Never use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.



This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the centre column of the body on the front passenger side upon opening the front passenger door. For some countries, the sticker is also affixed to the sun visor of the front passenger.



fig. 123 . The sticker is visible



It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when a child safety seat is nevertheless attached to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel lations regarding the use of child safety seats.



page 123, “Deactivating airbags”. If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regu-



If the front passenger airbag has been switched off by a specialist garage using the vehicle system tester, the passenger's side airbag and the head airbag remain switched on. Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.



If a child safety seat in which the child faces in the direction of travel is used on the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat must be moved back and to the top fully. Move the seat backrest into the vertical position.



You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.

Fig. 123 Sticker on the centre column of the body on the front passenger side.

We recommend, for safety reasons, that you always mount a child restraint systems on the rear seats whenever possible. If you still decide, however, to use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat then you must pay attention to the following warnings in connection with the use of the airbag system on the front passenger seat.

s33o.book Page 127 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Transporting children safely 127

Child safety and side airbag

Children must never be seated in the deployment area of the side airbags and head airbags.

WARNING (continued)



When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.



Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag - risk of injury!



Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbag - risk of injury!

Fig. 124 Unprotected child/Child properly protected by safety seat

In the event of a side collision, the side airbags offer the vehicle occupants enhanced protection.

The side airbags are inflated in fractions of a second in order to be able to provide this protection  page 120, “Function of the side airbags”.

The airbag develops such force that passengers could be injured if they do are not sitting up straight or if there are objects in the region where the airbag inflates.

This applies particularly to children if they are not transported in accordance with legal requirements.

The child is protected when seated in a child safety seat matching its age. Adequate room is available between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag and head airbag. The airbag offers optimal protection.

WARNING



It is essential to always switch off seats.



Child seat

Classification of child seats into groups

Only child safety seats which have an official approval and are suit able for the child, may be used.

ECE-R 44 standard applies to child safety seats. ECE-R means: Economic Commis sion for Europe - Regulation.

Child safety seats which have been tested for conformity to ECE-R 44 standard have a non-detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test number) attached to the seat.

Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups:

Group

0 0+ 1 2 3

Weight

0 - 10 kg up to 13 kg 9 - 18 kg 15 - 25 kg 22 - 36 kg  page 128  page 128  page 128  page 129  page 129 Children who are more than 1.50 m tall or who weigh more than 36 kg can use normal seat belts without a seat bolster.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 128 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

128 Transporting children safely

Use of child seats

An overview of the usefulness of child seats on each of the seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard:

Child seat of the group

0 0+ 1 2 and 3

Front passenger seat Rear seat outside

A A A A A A

Rear seat middle

Universal category - seat is suitable for all approved types of child safety seats.

The seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the “

ISOFIX

” system.

The seat is equipped as standard with the fixing system “

Top Tether

”.

Child seats of group 0/0+

WARNING



It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag at a specialist garage or with the switch for front passenger airbag when attaching in excep tional circumstances a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel



page 123.



Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.



If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are deployed.



You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.

Child safety seats in Group 1

Fig. 125 Child seats of group 0/0+

The optimal solution for babies of up to about 9 months old weighing up to 10 kg or children up to about 18 months old weighing up to 13 kg is a child safety seat which is fastened in the opposite direction of travel  fig. 125 .

Child seats in which the child is facing with its back towards the direction of travel should not be used on the front passenger seat when the vehicle is fitted with a front passenger airbag

 page 126, “Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat”.

Fig. 126 Child seat with padded table in Group 1 installed on rear seat bench facing the direction of travel

Child seats in Group 1 are for babies and small children up to 4 years of age with a weight of between 9 and 18 kilograms. It is best for children in the lower range of this group, to use a child seat which allows the child to sit with its back to the direc tion of travel. It is best for children in the upper range of the Group 0+, to use a child seat which allows the child to sit  fig. 126 in the direction of travel.

Child seats in which the child is facing with its back towards the direction of travel should not be used on the front passenger seat when the vehicle is fitted with a front passenger airbag

 page 126, “Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat”.

s33o.book Page 129 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Transporting children safely 129 WARNING





page 123.



Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.



If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are deployed.



You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.

Child safety seats in Group 2

WARNING (continued) it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over your hip if neces sary.



Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.

Child safety seats in Group 3

Fig. 127 Child seat in Group 2 installed on the rear seat facing the direction of travel

For children up to about 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg the optimal solution is a child safety seat in combination with the three-point seat belt  fig. 127 .

WARNING



When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats. Switch off the front passenger airbag if necessary at a specialist garage or switch it off with the switch for front passenger airbag



page 123.



The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account run across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis and fits snugly; Fig. 128 Child seat in Group 3 installed on the rear seat facing the direction of travel

For children of about 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg and of a height of less than 150 cm, the optimal solution is a child safety seat (seat bolster) in combination with the three-point seat belt  fig. 128 .

Children who are more than 1.50 m tall or who weigh more than 36 kg can use normal seat belts without a seat bolster.

WARNING





page 123.



The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account run across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis and fits snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over your hip if neces sary.



Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 130 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

130 Transporting children safely

Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX” system

Fig. 129 Locking eyes (ISOFIX system)/Push the ISOFIX child seat into the installed mounting funnels

There are two locking eyes between the rear exterior seat backrest and the surface of the seat itself on both sides for fixing the “ISOFIX” system child seat in place.

– Insert the mounting funnels A onto the locking eyes backrest and the seat cushion  fig. 129 .

A between the seat – Push the notched arms of the child seat into the locking eyes until they are heard to lock in place  fig. 129 .

–

Pull on both sides of the child seat!

One can mount a child safety seat using the “ISOFIX” system quickly, easily and reli ably. Please pay close attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing the seat.

Child seats fitted with the “ISOFIX” system can only be mounted and fixed in a vehicle fitted with an “ISOFIX” system when these child seats have been released for this type of vehicle according to the ECE-R 44 standard.

Child safety seats with the fixing system “ISOFIX” can be obtained from Škoda orig inal accessories.

Complete installation instructions are enclosed with the child safety seat.

WARNING



The locking eyes have just been developed for child safety seats which use the “ISOFIX” system. You should therefore never attach other child safety seats, seat belts or objects to the locking eyes - hazard!



WARNING (continued)



Ask an authorised Škoda Service Partner whether a child seat which you bought for another vehicle is recommended for use in a Škoda before using an “ISOFIX” system.



Certain child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system can be attached with standard three-point seat belts. Please pay close attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing the seat.

Note

 Child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system are currently available for children weighing up to about 18 kg. This corresponds to an age range up to 4 years.

The child seats can also be fitted with the “Top Tether” system  page 130.

Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system

Fig. 130 Rear seat: Top Tether

IIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment of the rear seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the “Top Tether” system  fig. 130 .

Always perform the installation and removal of the child seat using the “Top Tether” system as stated in the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat.

WARNING



Attach the child seats with the “Top Tether” system only to the points provided for this purpose



fig. 130 .



On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other anchorage points.

s33o.book Page 131 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

WARNING (continued)



Pay attention to the important safety information regarding the use of child seats



page 125.

Note

Store the remaining part of the belt for the “Top Tether” system in a textile pocket, which is located at the child seat.

Transporting children safely 131 Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 132 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

132 Transporting children safely

s33o.book Page 133 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Intelligent Technology 133

Driving Tips

Intelligent Technology Electronic stability programme (ESP)

General

General

The ESP aids you in maintaining control of your vehicle in situations in which the vehicle is driving at its dynamic limits, such as entering a curve fast. The risk of skid ding is reduced and your car thus offers greater driving stability depending on the conditions of the road surface. The system operates at all speeds.

The following systems are integrated into the electronic stability programme:      Electronic Differential Lock (EDL), Traction control system (TCS), Antilock brake system (ABS), Brake Assist, Uphill Start Assist

Operating principle

The ESP switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a self-test. The ESP control unit processes data from the individual systems. It also processes additional measurement data which are supplied by highly sensitive sensors: the rotational velocity of the vehicle about its vertical axis, the lateral acceleration of the vehicle, the braking pressure and the steering angle.

The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If differences exist, such as the car beginning to skid, the ESP will automatically brake the appropriate wheel.

The car is stabilised again by the forces which take effect when the wheel is braked. Intervention into the brake system takes place primarily on the outer front wheel of a vehicle which tends to oversteer (tendency for the rear of the vehicle to break away) while occurs this is on the inner rear wheel of a vehicle which tends to under steer (tendency to shift out of the curve). This braking control cycle is accompanied by noises.

During an intervention of the system, the warning light instrument cluster.

 flashes quickly in the

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

The ESP system cannot be switched off, only the TCS system can be switched off by pressing the button  page 134, fig. 131 the TCS system is switched off.

. The warning light   page 29 lights up if The warning light  lights up permanently if there is a fault in the ESP system.

The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.

WARNING It is also not possible for the ESP to overcome the physical limits of the vehicle. Even if a vehicle fitted with ESP you should still always adapt your style of driving to the condition of the road surface and the traffic situation. This partic ularly applies when driving on slippery and wet roads. The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an acci dent!

Note

 All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem free operation of the ESP. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to an undesirable reduction in the engine output.

 Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combi nation of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ESP “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.

 page 174,

Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDL)

The electronic differential lock prevents an individual wheel from slipping.

Models fitted with ESP are equipped with electronic differential lock (EDL).

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 134 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

134 Intelligent Technology General

The EDL makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate and climb slopes when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.

Operating principle

The EDL is activated automatically, that is without any action on the part of the driver. It monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS sensors. Should only

one

drive wheel begin spinning on a slippery surface there will be an appreciable difference in the speed of the driven wheels. The EDL function brakes the slipping wheel and the differential transmits a greater driving force to the other driven wheel. This control process is also accompanied by noises.

Overheating of the brakes

The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being braked. The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL.

The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.

XDL function (Fabia RS and Fabia Combi RS only)

The XDL function is an extension to the electronic differential lock. The XDL func tion does not respond to traction, but to the relief of the inner front wheel during fast cornering. An active brake intervention on the brake of the inner wheel prevents it from spinning. Thus, the traction is improved and the vehicle continues to follow the desired track.

WARNING



Carefully depress the accelerator when accelerating on uniformly slippery road surfaces, such as ice and snow. The driven wheels might still spin despite the EDL and affect the stability of the vehicle - risk of an accident!



You should always adapt your style of driving to the condition of road surface and to the traffic situation even when your vehicle is fitted with EDL. The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than other wise - risk of an accident!

Note

 If the ABS or ASR or, where applicable, ESP indicator light lights up, the EDl may have a fault. Contact a specialist garage as soon as possible.

 Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combi nation of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the EDL “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.

 page 174,

Traction control system (TCS)

The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spin ning when accelerating.

Fig. 131 TCS switch General

The TCS makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate and climb slopes when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.

Operating principle

The TCS switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a self-test. The system monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS sensors. If the wheels are spinning, the force transmitted to the road surface is automatically adapted by reducing the engine speed. The system operates at all speeds.

The TCS operates in combination with the ABS  page 136, “Antilock brake system (ABS)”. The TCS will not function if a fault exists in the ABS system.

The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on the TCS   page 29.

During an intervention of the system, the TCS warning light ment cluster  page 30.

 flashes in the instru-

Switching off

You can switch the TCS off and on again as you wish by pressing the button  fig. 131 . The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when the TCS is switched off   page 29.

s33o.book Page 135 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM The TCS should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice in certain exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip, to switch off the system.

Examples:  when driving with snow chains   when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck.

then you should switch on the TCS again.

WARNING You should always adjust your style of driving to the conditions of the road surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!

Note

 All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem free operation of the TCS. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to an undesirable reduction in the engine output.

 Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combi nation of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the TCS “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.

 page 174,

Brakes

What has a negative effect on braking efficiency?

Wear-and-tear

Wear-and-tear to the brake pads is greatly dependent on the operating conditions of the vehicle and your style of driving. Particularly if you drive a great deal in towns and over short distances or if you adopt a sporty style of driving, it may be necessary to have the thickness of the brake pads inspected at a specialist garage between the service inspections.

Wet roads or road salt

There may be a certain delay before the brakes take full effect under certain condi tions such as when driving through water, during heavy rain showers or after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic vehicle wash, since the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or even have a coating of ice on them in winter. You should

Intelligent Technology 135

dry the brakes as soon as possible by applying and releasing the brakes several times.

There also may be a certain delay before the full braking efficiency is available when driving on roads which have been treated with road salt if you have not used the brakes for some considerable time beforehand. The layer of salt on the brake discs and brake pads must first be rubbed off when you apply the brakes.

Corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system.

We recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes at a fairly high speed if you do not make much use of the braking system or if surface corrosion is present  .

Faults in the brake surface

If you notice that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further, it is possible that a brake circuit of the dual circuit brake system has failed. Drive, in such cases, to the nearest specialist garage without delay in order to have the problem rectified. Drive at a reduced speed while on your way to the dealer and adapt your style of driving to the higher brake pedal pressure required.

Low brake fluid level

An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system. The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically  page 30, “Brake system  ”.

WARNING



Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeop ardy.



When retrospectively mounting a front spoiler, solid wheel hubs etc. one must ensure that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced other wise the braking system could run too hot.



Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking effi ciency until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first “run in” before they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however, compensate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal. This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future date.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 136 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

136 Intelligent Technology Caution

 Never allow the brakes to rub by applying slight pressure if you do not wish to brake the vehicle. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear.

 Before negotiating a steep downhill section, please reduce your speed, shift down into the next lower gear (manual gearbox) or select a lower driving stage (automatic gearbox). This enables you to make full use of the braking power of the vehicle and reduces the strain on the brakes. Any additional braking should be done intermittently, not continuously.

Note

The brake light flashes automatically in case of an emergency braking at speeds greater than 60 km/h or with the intervention of the ABS, which lasts longer than 1.5 seconds. After the speed was reduced below 10 km/h or the vehicle was stopped, the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on. The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again.

Brake booster

The brake booster boosts the pressure which you generate with the brake pedal. The necessary pressure is only generated when the engine is running.

  

WARNING Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary.

When stopping or braking with a petrol engine car and manual transmission in the low rev range, press down the clutch. Failure to do so may impair the func tioning of the brake booster. You apply greater force than you are used to on the brake pedal - danger of accident!

Antilock brake system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking.

General

The ABS contributes significantly to enhancing the active safety of your vehicle. Compared to a car not fitted with the ABS brake system, you are able to retain optimal steering ability even during a full brake application on a slippery road surface because the wheels do not lock up.

You must not expect, however, that the braking distance will be shorter under all circumstances as a result of the ABS. The braking distance for example on gravel and fresh snow, when you should anyway be driving slowly and cautiously, will be longer.

Operating principle

The brake pressure will be reduced on a wheel which is rotating at a speed which is too low for the speed of the vehicle and tending to lock. This control cycle is notice able from a

pulsating movement of the brake pedal

which is accompanied by noises. This is consciously intended to provide the driver with the information that the wheels are tending to lock (ABS control range). You must always keep the brake pedal depressed to enable the ABS to optimally control the brake application in this braking range. Never interrupt the application of the brakes!

As soon as the vehicle speed has increased to about 20 km/hour an automatic test procedure is conducted during which you will be able to hear a pumping noise for about 1 second.

WARNING



The ABS can also not overcome the physical limits of your vehicle. Please do not forget this, particularly when driving on icy or wet road surfaces. If the ABS is operating within the control range, adapt your speed immediately to the conditions of the road surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety offered by the ABS must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!



The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault. Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know how great the damage is and the limitation it is placing on the braking efficiency.



Note

A warning light comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system   page 30.

s33o.book Page 137 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM  Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combi nation of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ABS “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.

 page 174,

Brake Assist

During a severe brake application (e.g. if a hazard exists), the Brake Assist increases the braking force and thus makes it possible to rapidly produce the pressure required in the brake system.

The majority of drivers do apply the brakes in good time in dangerous situations, but do not depress the brake pedal with sufficient pressure. Consequently, it is not possible for the car to achieve its maximum deceleration and the car covers a greater distance than necessary.

The Brake Assist is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. In such cases, a much greater braking pressure exists than during a normal brake applica tion. This makes it possible, even with a relatively low resistance of the brake pedal, to produce an adequate pressure in the brake system in the shortest possible time, which is required for maximum deceleration of the car. You must apply the brake pedal firmly and hold it in this position in order to achieve the shortest possible braking distance.

The Brake Assist is able to help you achieve a shorter braking distance in emergency situations by rapidly producing the pressure required in the brake system. It fully exploits the attributes of the ABS. After you release the brake pedal, the function of the Brake Assist is automatically switched off and the brakes operate in the normal way.

The Brake Assist is part of the ESP system. If a fault occurs in the ESP, the Brake Assist function is also not available. Further information on the ESP  page 133.

WARNING



The Brake Assist is also not able to overcome the physical limits of your car in terms of the braking distance required.



Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic situ ation.



The increased safety offered by the Brake Assist must not tempt you to take a greater safety risk than otherwise.

Intelligent Technology 137

Uphill Start Assist

The uphill start assist makes it easier to start off on steep hills. The system assists a start off by holding the brake pressure produced by the brake pedal actuation for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the brake pedal. The driver can therefore move his foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and start off on the slope, without having to actuate the handbrake. The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal. If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds, it starts to roll back.

The uphill start assist is active as of a 3 % slope, if the driver door is closed. It is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. When driving downhill, it is inactive.

Electrohydraulic power steering

The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force.

The steering characteristics can be changed by a specialist garage.

You will place great stresses on the power steering system if the steering is turned to full lock when the vehicle is stationary. Turning the steering to full lock in such a situation will be accompanied by noises.

It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the engine is not running (vehicle being towed in). The only difference is that greater physical effort is required.

It is possible that the hydraulic pump of the power steering will not run due to the low vehicle network voltage if the battery has gone flat and the engine must started with the help off jump leads. This condition will be indicated by lighting up of the warning light.

The power steering operates again if the battery is charged to a specific range when engine is running. It also operates again, if the engine can be started with its own battery.

If there is a fault in the power steering, the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster   page 25.

WARNING Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 138 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

138 Intelligent Technology Caution

Never leave the steering wheel at full lock for more than 15 seconds when the engine is running - risk of damaging the power steering!

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Fig. 132 Button for setting the tyre infla tion pressure control value

The tyre pressure monitoring system compares with the aid of the ABS sensors the speed and also the rolling circumference of the individual wheels. If the rolling circumference of a wheel is changed, the warning light  lights up in the instru ment cluster  page 29 and an audible signal sounds. The rolling circumference of the tyre can change if:     the tyre inflation pressure is too low, the structure of the tyre is damaged, the vehicle is loaded on one side, the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill),  snow chains are mounted,   the temporary spare wheel is mounted, one wheel per axle was changed.

Basic setting of the system

After changing the tyre inflation pressures, after changing one or several wheels, the position of a wheel on the vehicle (e.g. exchanging the wheels between the axles) or when the warning light lights up while driving, a basic setting of the system must be carried out as follows.

 Inflate all tyres to the specified inflation pressure  page 169.

  Switch on the ignition.

Press button    button, the warning light fig. 132 for more than 2 seconds. While pressing the  lights up. At the same time the memory of the system is erased and the new calibration is started, which is confirmed with an audible signal and then the warning light  goes out.

 If the warning light  does not go out after the basic setting, there is a fault in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest specialist garage.

Warning light



lights up

If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated in comparison to the stored basic value, the warning light   lights up.

Warning light



flashes

If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest specialist garage.

WARNING



When the warning light





The driver is responsible for the correct tyre inflation pressures. For this reason, the tyre inflation pressures must be checked regularly.



Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved roads) the warning light



can be delayed or does not light up at all.



The tyre pressure monitoring system does not take away the responsibility from the driver for the correct tyre inflation pressure.

Note

The tyre pressure monitoring system:  does not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control, because the system cannot detect an even pressure loss,  sudden tyre damage. In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden steering movements and without sharp braking.

 cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss, e.g. in case of In order to ensure a proper functioning of the tyre inflation pressure-control system, it is necessary to carry out the basic setting again every 10 000 km or 1x a year.

s33o.book Page 139 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Diesel particle filter (diesel engine)

In the diesel particle filter the resulting soot particles are collected and burnt during the combustion of diesel fuel.

Intelligent Technology 139 Fig. 133 Vehicle data sticker

Code

7GG

7MB

7MG

on the vehicle data sticker, see  fig. 133 , indicates that your vehicle is equipped with a diesel particle filter. The vehicle data sticker is located on the floor of the luggage compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule.

The diesel particle filter filters the soot particles completely from the exhaust. The soot is collected in the diesel particle filter and burnt regularly. To assist this proce dure, we recommend not to drive regularly over short distances.

If the diesel particle filter is full or it is not functioning correctly, it is indicated by the warning light  .

WARNING



The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures. Therefore do not park at points where the hot filter comes into direct contact with dry grass or other combustible materials - risk of fire!



Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filter or heat shields. When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances might ignite - risk of fire.

Note

When using diesel fuel with high sulphur content the life of the diesel particle filter is clearly reduced. A specialist garage will be able to tell you which countries use only diesel fuel with high sulphur content.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 140 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

140 Driving and the Environment

Driving and the Environment The first 1 500 kilometres - and then afterwards

A new engine

The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres.

Up to 1 000 kilometres

– Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the mamimum speed of the gear in use, that is 3/4 of the maximum permissible engine speed.

– Do not use full throttle.

– Avoid high engine revolutions.

– Do not tow a trailer.

From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres

– Increase the power output of the engine

gradually

up to the full speed of the gear engaged, that is up to the maximum permissible engine revolutions.

During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you adopt during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your car.

You should not drive at unnecessarily

high engine revolutions

even after the running-in period is complete. The maximum permissible engine speed is marked by the beginning of the red zone on the scale of the revolutions counter. Shift up into the next higher gear on a vehicle fitted with manual gearbox before the red zone is reached. During acceleration (depressing the accelerator) which can lead to engine damage.

exceptionally

high engine speeds are automatically reduced, yet the engine is not protected against too high engine speeds which are caused by incorrectly shifting down the gears resulting in a sudden increase of the engine speeds above the permitted maximum revolutions For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also applies: Do not drive at engine revolutions which are

too low

. Shift down as soon as the engine is no longer running smoothly.

Caution

All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature. Never rev up an engine which is cold, neither when the vehicle is stationary nor when driving in individual gears.

For the sake of the environment

Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear as early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise levels and protects the environment.

New tyres

New tyres have to be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first. You should take account of this fact for the first 500 kilometres and drive particularly carefully.

New brake pads

Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking efficiency until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first “run in” before they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however, compensate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal.

This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future date.

During the running-in period, you should avoid excessive stresses on the brakes. This includes, for example, violent braking, particularly from very high speeds, and also when crossing mountain passes.

Catalytic converter

Proper operation of the emission control system (catalytic converter) is of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmentally conscious way.

Please refer to the following guidelines:

s33o.book Page 141 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM – For vehicles with petrol engine only refuel with unleaded petrol  “Unleaded petrol”.

page 155, – Never run the fuel tank completely empty.

– Do not switch off the ignition while you are driving the vehicle.

– Do not pour too much oil into the engine  page 161, “Replenishing engine oil”. If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available, you must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a country in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory.

WARNING



In view of the high temperatures which may be produced in the catalytic converter, one should always park a vehicle in such a way that the catalytic converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials below the vehicle - a risk of fire!



Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields. Such substances might ignite when driving - risk of fire!

Caution

 On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter, never let the fuel tank run completely empty. An irregular fuel supply can result in poor ignition or misfiring. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.

 Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic converter being destroyed.

 If you detect misfiring, a drop in performance or irregular engine running when driving, reduce your speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected by the nearest specialist garage. The symptoms described may be caused by a fault in the ignition system. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environment

Even if the exhaust system is operating properly, a sulphur-like exhaust odour may be produced under certain operating conditions of the engine. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel. It is often sufficient to refuel with unleaded premium grade petrol of a different brand or at a different filling station.

Driving and the Environment 141

Driving in an economical and environmentally conscious manner

General

Your personal style of driving is a major factor.

Your fuel consumption, any pollution of the environmental and the wear-and-tear to the engine, brakes and tyres, depend essentially on three factors:    your personal style of driving, the conditions under which your vehicle is operated, technical aspects.

You can easily improve your fuel economy by 10 - 15 percent by driving in an econom ical way with foresight. This section is intended to provide you with a number of tips on how to protect the environment and at the same time save money.

The fuel consumption can naturally also be influenced by factors which are beyond the driver's control. It is, for example, normal for the fuel consumption to increase in winter and under worsened conditions such as poor road conditions, towing a trailer, etc.

The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. Special attention has been given to minimising negative effects on the environment. It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness.

The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating, in order to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle.

Looking ahead when driving

A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs it accelerates.

Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily. If you drive with forsight you will not need to brake so often and will also then not have to accelerate so much. Let your vehicle coast to a stop, for example, if this is possible, when you see that the next set of traffic lights is at red.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 142 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

142 Driving and the Environment

Shifting gears and saving energy

Shifting up early saves on fuel.

Avoiding full throttle

Driving more slowly means saving fuel.

Fig. 134 Fuel consumption in litres/100 km. and speed in km/h.

Manual gearbox

– Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear.

– Shift up into the next higher gear at approx. 2 000 to 2 500 revs.

An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up To shift in a fuel-efficient manner, follow 

early

. You will consume more fuel if you drive at unnecessarily high revolutions in any given gear. page 18, “Gearshift indicator for changing gears”.

Automatic gearbox

– Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly

. Do not depress it beyond the kickdown position, however.

Only depress the accelerator pedal slowly if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox in order to automatically select an economic driving programme. You will achieve good fuel economy by shifting up early and shifting down late.

General

The  fig. 134 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle in the relevant gears. Fuel consumption in 1st gear is the highest, while that in 5th or the 6th gear is the lowest.

Note

Also use the information supplied by the multi-functional indicator  page 18.

Fig. 135 Fuel consumption in litres/100 km. and speed in km/h.

Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consumption but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehicle.

You should avoid exploiting the top speed of your vehicle wherever possible. Fuel consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds.

The  fig. 135 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle. You will cut your fuel consumption by half if you only make use three-quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle.

Reducing idling

Idling also costs fuel.

It is worthwhile switching off the engine in a traffic jam or when waiting at a level crossing or at traffic lights with a lengthy red phase. Even after just 30 - 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up again.

If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particularly high in the warming-up phase. This is why you should drive off right after starting the engine. Do avoid high engine revolutions at this time, however.

s33o.book Page 143 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Regular servicing

A poorly tuned engine consumes an unnecessarily high amount of fuel.

Having your vehicle serviced regularly at a specialist garge enables you to satisfy

one

of the requirements for economical motoring even before you set off on your journey. Keeping your vehicle properly serviced not only has a positive effect on the safety of your vehicle and maintaining its value, but also saves on

fuel

A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 % higher than normal.

The foreseen maintenance work should be undertaken exactly according to the Service schedule by a specialist garage.

Also check the

oil level

after refueling.

Oil consumption

is dependent to a consider able extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil consumption could be as high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style of driving.

It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first, and reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. It is therefore not possible to correctly assess the oil consumption of a new vehicle until after you have driven about 5 000 km.

For the sake of the environment

 You can achieve additional improvements in your fuel economy by using high lubricity oils.

 Check the ground below your car at regular intervals to detect any leakages in good time. Please have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garge if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips Driving and the Environment 143

Avoid driving short distances

Short distances result in an above-average high fuel consumption.

Fig. 136 Fuel consumption in litres/100 km at different temperatures

– Avoid driving a distance of no more than 4 km if the engine is cold.

The engine and catalytic converter must first have reached their optimal

operating temperature

in order to effectively reduce fuel consumption and pollutant emis sions.

The cold engine vehicle consumes approx. 15 - 20 litres/100 km of fuel immediately after starting. Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre. The engine reaches its operating temperature (outside temperature and engine dependent) only after about

4 to 10

kilometres and the fuel consumption then stabilizes. You should therefore avoid driving short distances whenever possible.

An important factor in this connection is also the

ambient temperature

. The  fig. 136 shows the different fuel consumptions for the same distance, on the one hand at +20 °C and on the other hand at -10 °C. Your vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in winter than in summer.

Checking tyre inflation pressures

Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel.

Always ensure that your tyres are inflated to the correct pressure at all times. The rolling resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is too low. This will not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen.

Always check the inflation pressure of the tyres when

cold

Do not drive with

winter tyres

all year round for this costs about 10 % more fuel. Winter tyres are also louder.

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 144 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

144 Driving and the Environment

No unnecessary ballast

Transporting ballast costs fuel.

The fact that every kilogram of extra porting any unnecessary ballast.

weight

increases your fuel consumption means that it is worth taking a look in the luggage compartment to avoid trans It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.

You may frequently also leave a

roof rack fitted

on just out of convenience, although you no longer need it. The increased aerodynamic drag of your vehicle causes it to use about 10 % more fuel than normal at a speed of 100 - 120 km/h, even when you are not carrying a load on the roof.

Saving electricity

Generating electricity costs fuel.

– Switch off electrical components as soon as you no longer need them.

When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical power. If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on, more fuel is needed to operate the alternator.

Keeping a log of your fuel consumption

If you really wish to keep a close check on your and to take any appropriate action.

fuel consumption

, it is best to enter the figures in a logbook. This does not take much time but is a very worthwhile exer cise. It enables you to detect any change (positive and negative) at an early stage If you find that your fuel consumption is too high, you should reflect on how, where and in what conditions you have driven the vehicle since you last refuelled.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, selection of mate rials and manufacture of your new Škoda. Particular emphasis has been paid to a number of aspects, including:

Design measures

 Joints designed to be easily detached.

      Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system.

Improved purity of different classes of materials.

Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation°260.

Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO 2 .

Minimum fuel leakage during accidents.

Reduced noise.

Choice of materials

 Extensive use of recyclable material.

    Air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant.

No cadmium.

No asbestos.

Reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics.

Manufacture

 Solvent-free cavity protection.

 Solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer.

  The use of solvent-free adhesives.

No CFCs used in the production process.

  Without use of mercury.

Use of water-soluble paints.

Trade-in and recycling of old cars

Škoda Auto meets the requirements of the brand and its products regarding envi ronment and ressource protection. All new Škoda vehicles can be utilized up to 95 % and always 11) be returned. In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks have been created, where you can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your vehicle, you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environ mental regulations.

Vehicles with special built-on types

Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user, in order to hand over later to the old car user. This ensures the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations.

11) Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements.

s33o.book Page 145 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Driving and the Environment 145

You can purchase headlight stickers from the range of the Škoda original parts.

Note

Detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old cars is available from a Škoda Service Partner.

Note

You can obtain further information regarding masking over or converting the head lights from your specialist garage.

Motoring abroad

General

Other circumstances may exist abroad.

It is also possible, in certain countries, that the Škoda Service Partner network is limited or has not been established yet. This is the reason why obtaining certain spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garage personnel may only be able to make limited repairs. Škoda Auto in the Czech Republic and its foreign importers are happy to provide information about technical aspects of the vehicle, required maintenance work and possibilities for getting repairs done.

Avoiding damage to your vehicle

When driving on poor roads and lanes or when driving over kerbstones, steep ramps etc., you must pay particular attention to ensuring that any low-slung parts of the vehicle, such as spoiler and exhaust, do not touch the ground and get damaged.

This particularly applies to models with a lowered suspension (sport suspension) and also when your vehicle is fully laden.

Driving through bodies of water on roads

Unleaded petrol

A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol  page 140. The automobile associations can provide you with information regarding the locations of filling stations which offer unleaded petrol.

Headlights

The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side of the road on which you are driving to a greater extent. If you drive abroad on the other side of the road, you will dazzle oncoming traffic.

Halogen projector headlights

The adaptation of the headlights (valid for vehicles which are designed for driving on the left and on the right) must be performed by switching over a bezel by a specialist garage.

Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function

Headlight beam setting  page 46, “Tourist light”.

Halogen headlight

When using Halogen headlights, it is necessary to stick a sticker over a certain part of the headlights in order to prevent the dazzling of oncoming traffic.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Fig. 137 Crossing bodies of water

In order to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving through bodies of water (e.g. flooded roads), observe the following:  Determine the depth of the water when driving through bodies of water. The water can reach at the maximum the web on the lower sill of the vehicle  fig. 137 .

 Drive no more than at walking speed. At a higher speed, a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the air induction system of the engine or into other parts of the vehicle.

 Never let the vehicle stand in the water, never drive backwards and do not switch off the engine.

Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 146 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

146 Driving and the Environment WARNING



Driving through water, mud, sludge etc. can reduce the braking power and extend the braking distance - risk of accident!



Avoid sudden and severe braking manoeuvres immediately after driving through bodies of water.



After driving through bodies of water, the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking. Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.

Caution

 When driving through bodies of water, parts of the vehicle such as the engine, gearbox, catalytic converter, chassis or electrics can be severely damaged.

 Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle.

 Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or impossible to drive through the body of water.

 Do not drive through salt water. The salt can lead to corrosion. Immediately rinse all the parts of the vehicle, which came into contact with the salt water, with fresh water.

Note

After driving through a body of water, we recommend that the vehicle is checked by a specialist garage.

s33o.book Page 147 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Towing a trailer 147

Towing a trailer Towing a trailer

Technical requirements

Your vehicle is designed primarily for transporting persons and luggage. It can, however, also be used for towing a trailer - provided certain technical equipment is fitted.

If your vehicle is already fitted with a legal requirements.

factory-fitted

trailer hitch, or with a trailer hitch from the range of Škoda original accessories, it meets all the technical and Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power socket for the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer. If the trailer which you wish to tow has a

7-pin connector

, you can use a suitable adapter from Škoda original accessories.

This work must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications if a towing device is retrofitted.

Authorised Škoda Service Partners can provide you with details relating to retrofit ting a towing device and for any necessary modifications to the cooling system.

WARNING We recommend that you have the towing device from Škoda original accessories installed by an authorised Škoda Service Partner. He is familiar with all the rele vant details relating to retrofitting such equipment. There is a risk of an accident if the towing device is not properly fitted!

General Maintenance

Trailer load

The permissible trailer load must on no account be exceeded.

You can negotiate appropriately steeper inclines and descents if you do not make full use of the permissible trailer load.

The trailer loads specified only apply for

altitudes

up to 1000 metres above mean sea level. The fact that the engine power output drops with increasing height due to a lowering of air pressure and thus the ability to climb, means that the towed weight must be reduced by 10 % for every further increase of 1000 metres in height above sea level. The towed weight is the weight of the (laden) vehicle and the (laden) trailer together. One should take this into account before driving up to higher altitudes.

The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device are merely test data for the towing device The data relating to your vehicle, which is often less than this test data, can be found in your vehicle registration docu ments.

Distribution of the load

Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that any heavy items are located as close as possible to the axle. Secure the items to prevent them slipping.

Tyre pressure

Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for that of “fully laden”,  page 169. The inflation pressure of the tyres fitted to the trailer adjust in accord ance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

Exterior mirrors

You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. Both exterior mirrors should be attached to folding arms. Adjust the mirrors so that they provide you with an adequate field of view to the rear.

Headlights

Before starting off with a hitched trailer, also check the setting of the headlights. Alter the setting as necessary with the aid of the headlight beam adjuster  page 48.

Detachable ball head

The ball rod is detachable on vehicles with towing device and suppliable from Škoda original accessories. It is stowed together with separate fitting instructions in the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment of the vehicle.

Note

 We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between service intervals if you tow a trailer frequently.

 The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and decou pling the trailer.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 148 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

148 Towing a trailer

Driving Tips

– Do not, as far as possible, drive with your vehicle unladen and the trailer laden.

– Do not make full use of the legal maximum speeds. This applies in particular to downhill sections.

– Apply the brakes in good time.

– Keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if the outside temperature is high.

Distribution of weight

The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination.

Driving speed

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h for safety reasons. This also applies for countries in which higher speeds are allowed.

The fact that the driving stability of the vehicle + trailer combination reduces with increasing speed means that the legally allowed speed should not be used when there are unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions, particularly near accident black spots.

You must always reduce your speed immediately as soon as you detect even just the

slightest swaying

of the trailer. On no account attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accelerating.

Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a downhill section to allow the engine to also act as a brake.

trailer brake

, apply the brakes gently at first and then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking. Shift down gears in good time before negotiating a

Engine overheating

Please keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if you have to negotiate a lengthy slope in a low gear at a high engine speed when the outside temperature is very high  page 16.

If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand area or even the red area of the scale, reduce your speed immediately. Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light few minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle   in the instrument cluster begins flashing. Wait a page 162, “Inspecting the coolant level”.

Please refer to the following guidelines  quantity   ”.

page 28, “Coolant temperature/coolant The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.

Any increase in the cooling effect of the coolant fan through shifting down a gear and increasing the engine speed is not possible since the fan speed is independent of the engine speed. One should also not drop a gear for this reason when towing a trailer as long as the engine can manage the slope without any drop in speed.

s33o.book Page 149 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 149

General Maintenance

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle General

Proper care helps retain the value of your vehicle.

Regular and proper care retains

the value

and paint defects on the bodywork.

of your vehicle. It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to corrosion damage We recommend you use vehicle care products from Škoda original accessories, which are available from authorised Škoda service partners. Please follow the instructions for use on the package.

WARNING



Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions.



Always store care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children - risk of poisoning!

     Frequency of use, The parking situation (garage, below trees etc.), Season of the year, Weather conditions, Environmental influences.

The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust, tar, soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paint work of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.

It may therefore be necessary, in certain circumstances, to wash the car

once a week

. It may also be sufficient, however, to wash the car

once a month

followed by appropriate wax treatment.

It is essential to also thoroughly wash the

underside of your vehicle

at the end of the winter road salting and gritting period.

For the sake of the environment

 Always select environmentally-friendly products when purchasing vehicle care products.

 Do not dispose of the packages with residues of care products in domestic waste.

WARNING When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency - risk of accident!

Care of the exterior of vehicle

Washing the vehicle

Frequent washing protects your vehicle.

The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is

frequent

washing and wax treatment. How often you should wash your vehicle depends on a wide range of factors, such as:

Automatic vehicle wash systems

The paintwork of the vehicle is sufficiently resistant that the vehicle can be washed normally in automatic vehicle wash plants without any problem. The actual stress to which the paintwork is subjected, however, depends greatly on the design of the vehicle wash system, the filtering of the water and the type of washing and care products used. If the paintwork of your vehicle appears mat after being washed or even has scratches, point this out to the operator of the vehicle wash plant. Use a different vehicle wash plant, if necessary.

There are no particular points to note before washing your vehicle in an automatic vehicle wash system other than the usual precautionary measures (closing the windows, unscrewing the aerial, etc.).

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 150 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

150 Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle

If you have any particular attached parts fitted to your car - such as spoiler, roof rack system, two-way radio aerial - it is best to first of all consult the operator of the car wash plant.

It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after passing through the automatic vehicle wash system.

Washing vehicle by hand

It is important to first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off as thor oughly as possible before washing your vehicle by hand.

One should then clean the vehicle using a soft

washing sponge

washing glove

or a

washing brush

and only slight pressure. Work from the top to the bottom - begin ning with the roof. Only place slight pressure on the vehicle paintwork during cleaning Only use a

car shampoo

for stubborn dirt.

Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.

Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such areas.

Rinse off the vehicle well after giving it a wash and dry it off using a chamois leather.

WARNING



The ignition should always be switched off when you wash your vehicle - risk of accident!



Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when you are cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims - risk of cuts.

  

Caution

Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight - risk of paint damage.

Ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or at the door and panel joints if you spray your vehicle in winter down with a hose - risk of freezing.

Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod ucts - risk of damage to the surface of paintwork.

For the sake of the environment

Only wash your vehicle at washing bays specifically reserved for this purpose. This ensures that no water which may be contaminated by oil flows into the sewage system. It is not even permitted to wash your vehicle in certain areas except at such specific washing bays.

Washing with a high-pressure cleaner

When you wash your vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, it is essential to comply with the instructions for use of the cleaning equipment. This applies in particular to the

pressure

used and to the

spraying distance

. Maintain a sufficiently large distance to soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.

On no account use

circular spray nozzles

or so-called

dirt cutters

WARNING It is particularly important that you do not clean tyres with circular spray jets. Damage may occur even at a relatively large spraying distance and if sprayed only for a short time.

Caution

The water containing wax must be no hotter than 60 °C, otherwise the vehicle can be damaged.

Wax treatment

Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful environmental influences and minor mechanical damage.

The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest, when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.

A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean bodywork after it has dried thoroughly. Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax.

Caution

Never apply wax to the windows.

s33o.book Page 151 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Polishing

Polishing is only necessary if the paintwork of your vehicle has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservers.

You must treat the paintwork with a wax preserver if the polish you use does not contain any preserving elements  page 150, “Wax treatment”.

Caution

 You must not treat mat painted parts or plastic with polishing products or hard wax.

 Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment, otherwise the paintwork can be scratched.

Chrome parts

First clean the chrome parts with a damp clotch and then polish them with a soft, dry cloth. If the chrome parts cannot be cleaned spotlessly using this method, use specific chrome care products.

Caution

Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment, otherwise they can be scratched.

Paint damage

Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches, scuffs or traces of chip damage must be touched up immediately with paint (Škoda painting pen) Partners.

before

any corrosion can result. You can of course have this work carried out by authorised Škoda Service The authorised Škoda Service Partners have a range of matching

touch-up pens

spray cans

available in the colour of your vehicle.

The paint number of the original paintwork of your vehicle is indicated on the vehicle data sticker  page 198.

If an corrosion arises, this will need to be removed thoroughly. Apply a

corrosion protection primer

and then the paint to the affected point. You can of course have this work carried out by authorised Škoda Service Partners.

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 151

Plastic parts

External plastic parts are cleaned by normal washing. Plastic parts and synthetic leather can also be treated with

special solvent-free plastic cleaning agents

if a damp cloth is not sufficient. Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts.

Caution

Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.

Windows

Only use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mirrors. You should not move the ice scraper forward and backward but in one direc tion on the window which you are cleaning in order to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass.

You can best remove residues of rubber, oil, grease, wax or silicone by using a special window cleaner or a special silicone remover.

You should also clean the windows regularly from the inside.

Do not use window leathers which you have used to polish the vehicle body to dry off the windows. Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the window and reduce visibility.

Do not affix any stickers over the inside of the rear window to avoid damage to the

heating elements of the rear window heater

Caution

 Never remove snow or ice from the glass parts with warm or hot water - risk of formation of cracks in the glass!

 When removing snow or ice from the windows and mirror lenses make sure not to damage the paintwork of the vehicle.

The headlight lenses

Please do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products for cleaning the front headlights - risk of damage to the plastic lenses.

Please use

soap and clean warm water.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 152 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

152 Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle Caution Never

wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects for cleaning the plastic lenses, this may result in damage to the protective paintwork and conse quently in formation of cracks on the headlight lenses, e.g. through effect of chem ical products.

Door and window seals

The rubber seals on the doors, boot lid, bonnet and windows remain supple and last longer if you treat them regularly with a rubber care product (e. g. with a spray with silicone-free oil). You also avoid premature wear of the seals and prevent leakages in this way. It is also easier to open the doors. Rubber seals which are well cared for also do not stick together in cold winter weather.

Locking cylinder

Use special products designed for this purpose to deice the locking cylinders.

Note

When washing your vehicle, ensure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinders.

Wheels

Steel wheels

You should also thoroughly wash the wheels and wheel trims when giving your vehicle its regular wash. This prevents any brake dust, dirt and road salt from sticking to the wheel hubs. You can remove stubborn brake abrasion adhering to the wheels with an industrial cleaner. Touch up any damage to the paintwork on the wheels before rust is able to form.

Light alloy wheels

Regular care of light alloy wheels is necessary in order to retain their decorative appearance over long periods. It is particularly important to remove regularly any road salt and brake abrasion from light alloy wheels, otherwise the light metal will suffer. Wash thoroughly and then treat the wheels with a protective product for light alloy wheels which does not contain any acidic components. We recommend to apply a hard wax layer onto the wheel hubs every three months. You must not use any products which cause abrasion when treating the wheel hubs. Any damage to the paint layer on the wheel hubs must be touched up immediately.

WARNING One should remember when cleaning the wheels that moisture, ice and road salt may adversely affect braking efficiency - risk of an accident!

Note

Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of the steering. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.

Underbody protection

The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechanical influences.

One cannot, however, completely rule out damage to the

protective layer

when driving so we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on the underside of your vehicle and on the chassis at certain intervals - this is best done at the begin ning and end of the winter - and to touch up any damaged areas.

The authorised Škoda Service Partners have suitable

spray products

available as well as the necessary equipment and are familiar with the instructions for use. Therefore, we recommend you have such touch-up work or additional corrosion protection measures carried out by an authorised Škoda service partner.

WARNING Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filter or heat shields. When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances might ignite - risk of fire!

Protection of hollow spaces

All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of

protective wax

applied in the factory.

This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re-treated. Please remove any small amount of wax which flows out of the cavities at high temperatures with a plastic scraper and clean the spot using petroleum cleaner.

s33o.book Page 153 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

WARNING Safety and environmental protection regulations should observed when using petroleum cleaner to remove wax - a risk of fire!

Care of the interior of vehicle

Plastic parts, artificial leather and cloths

You can clean plastic parts and artificial leather with a moist cloth. You should only treat such parts with special

solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products

it does prove to be adequate.

Upholstery cloth and cloth trim on the doors, luggage compartment cover, headliner etc. are best treated with special cleaning products, using if necessary a

dry foam

and a soft sponge or brush.

Caution

Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.

Fabric covers of electrically heated seats

not clean

the seat covers moist as this may result in damage to the seat heating system.

Clean such covers using special agents, for example dry foam.

Natural leather

Natural leather requires quite particular care and attention.

Leather should be treated from time to time according the following guidelines depending on how much it is used.

Normal cleaning

– Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or woollen cloth.

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 153 Severe soiling

– Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth dipped in a mild soapy solution (2 spoon fuls of natural soap to 1 litre of water).

– Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no water gets into the stitching of the seams.

– Dry off the leather with a soft, dry cloth.

Removing stains

– Remove fresh stains which are

water-based

for a stain which has already dried in.

(e.g. coffee, tea, juices, blood etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household paper or use the cleaner from the care set – Remove fresh stains on a

fat base

(e.g. butter, mayonnaise, chocolate etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household cleaning paper or with the cleaner from the care set if the stain has not yet penetrated into the surface.

– Use a grease dissolver for

grease stains which have dried in

– Eliminate

special stains

(e.g. ball-point pens, felt pen, nail varnish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.) with a special stain remover suitable for leather.

Leather care

– Treat the leather every six months with a special leather care product.

– Apply only a small amount of the care product.

– Dry the leather off with a soft cloth

Caution

 You must on no account treat the leather with solvents (e.g. gasoline, turpen tine), floor wax, shoe cream or such like.

 Avoid leaving your vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight in order to avoid bleaching the leather. If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods, protect the leather from the direct rays of the sun by covering it over.

 Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharp edged belts may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface.

Note

 Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect regularly and each time after cleaning the leather. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 154 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

154 Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle

breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface protection.

   Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months, remove fresh soiling each time this occurs.

Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe cream etc., as quickly as possible.

a special coloured leather cream as required.

 Care also for the leather dye. Refreshen areas which have lost their colour with The leather is a natural material with specific properties. During the use of the vehicle, minor optical changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers (e. g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the covers).

Seat belts

– Keep the seat belts clean!

– Wash seat belts which have become soiled using a mild soapy solution.

– Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition.

Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from reeling up the belt properly.

 

The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids (such as acids etc.).



reel or the lock should be replaced by a specialist garage.



WARNING The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.

Never clean the seat belts chemically as dry cleaning may destroy the fabric. Seat belts which have damage to the webbing, the connections, the inertia Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up.

s33o.book Page 155 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Fuel 155

Fuel Petrol

Unleaded petrol

Your vehicle can only be operated with

unleaded petrol

, which complies with the standard

EN 228

(in Gemany also

DIN 51626 - 1

E10

for unleaded petrol with the octane rating

RON and

RON or

DIN 51626 - 2

for unleaded petrol with the octane rating

). On the inside of the fuel filler flap, you will find the informa tion regarding the RON required by your engine  page 156, fig. 138 - right.

Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol 95/91 RON

Use unleaded petrol with the octane rating

RON. You can also use unleaded petrol

RON, but this leads to a slight loss in performance.

If, in case of necessity, the vehicle must be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed, you must continue driving at medium engine speeds and low engine load. High engine revs or a greater engine load can cause major damage to the engine! Refuel as soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane number.

Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol min. 95 RON

Use unleaded petrol with the octane rating

RON.

If unleaded petrol with the octane rating

RON is not available, you can use petrol with the octane rating

RON in an emergency. You must continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum engine load. High engine revs or a greater engine load can cause major damage to the engine! Refuel as soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane number.

Even in case of necessity, you must not use petrol of a lower octane rating than

RON, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged! You can find further information on refuelling  page 156, “Refuelling”.

Unleaded petrol with higher octane number

You can make unlimited use of unleaded petrol which has a higher octane number than the one prescribed.

In vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol

95/91

RON, the use of petrol with a higher octane number than

RON does not result in a noticeable power increase or a lower fuel consumption.

On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol

min. 95

RON, the use of petrol with a higher octane number than

RON does not result in a power increase or a lower fuel consumption.

Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol 98/95 RON

Use unleaded petrol with the octane rating

RON. You can also use unleaded petrol

RON, but this leads to a slight loss in performance.

If unleaded petrol with the octane rating

RON or

RON is not available, you can use petrol with the octane rating

Even in case of necessity, you must not use petrol of a lower octane rating than

RON, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged!

Caution

 All Škoda vehicles with petrol engines are equipped with a catalytic converter and must be only driven with unleaded petrol. Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic converter being destroyed!

 Only use unleaded petrol that satisfies the standard

EN 228

(in Germany also

DIN 51626 - 1

E10

for unleaded petrol with the octane rating

RON and

RON or

DIN 51626 - 2

for unleaded petrol with the octane rating

 If you use petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed, the engine can be severely damaged!

Diesel

Diesel fuel

Your vehicle can only be operated with

diesel fuel

, which complies with the standard

EN 590

(standard

DIN 51628

in Germany, standard

ÖNORM C 1590

in Austria,

GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004

in Russia).

Fuel additives

You must not use fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar prod ucts) in diesel fuel.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 156 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

156 Fuel

You can find information on refuelling  page 156, “Refuelling”.

Caution

 Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel which complies with the standard

EN 590

(standard

DIN 51628

in Germany, standard

ÖNORM C 1590

in Austria,

GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004

in Russia). Filling the tank even only once with diesel fuel which does not comply with the standard, can result in damage to the engine parts, the lubrication system, the fuel and exhaust system.

 If by mistake you have refuelled with a different fuel other than the diesel fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards (e. g. petrol), do not start the engine or switch on the ignition! Major engine damage is possible! Contact a specialist garage and have the fuel system of the engine cleaned.

  Water which has collected in the fuel filter can result in engine problems.

Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel (RME), therefore this fuel must not be refuelled and driven. The use of biofuel (RME) can lead to damage to the engine or the fuel system.

Operation in winter

Winter-grade diesel fuel

A different grade of diesel fuel is available at filling stations in winter than during the summer. Using “summer-grade diesel fuel” at temperatures below 0 °C can result in operational problems because the diesel becomes viscous as a result of paraffin separation.

For this reason, the standard

EN 590

(also

DIN 51628

in Germany,

ÖNORM C 1590

in Austria,

GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004

in Russia) prescribes the diesel fuel class for each season in the year which may be sold during the corresponding season. “Winter-grade diesel fuel” will still operate properly even at a temperature of -20 °C.

It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic. The authorised Škoda Service Partners and filling stations in the country concerned will be able to provide you with information regarding the diesel fuels available.

Prewarming fuel

The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter prewarming system. This secures operation of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of -25 °C.

Caution

It is not permitted to add the various fuel additives on the market, including petrol, to diesel fuel in order to improve its flow properties.

Refuelling

Fig. 138 Right rear side of the vehicle: Fuel filler flap/fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed Opening the fuel filler cap

– Open the fuel filler flap with the hand  fig. 138 - left.

– Hold the fuel tank cap of the fuel filler tube with one hand and unlock it by turning with the vehicle key to the left.

– Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and place the fuel filler cap from above on the fuel filler flap  fig. 138 - right.

Closing fuel filler cap

– Screw on the cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to lock.

– Hold the fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube with one hand and lock it by turning the vehicle key to the right and withdraw the key.

– Press the fuel tank flap closed.

The correct grade of fuel for your vehicle as well as the tyre size and inflation pres sures are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap. Further infor mation on fuel  page 155.

s33o.book Page 157 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

WARNING Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare canister in the vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for safety reasons. The canister can be damaged in the event of an accident and fuel may leak out.

Caution

 Remove any fuel which has spilled onto the paintwork of your vehicle immedi ately - risk of paint damage!

 On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter, never let the fuel tank run completely empty. An irregular supply of fuel to the engine can result in misfiring and unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system, which may result in overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.

 Make sure that the valve is not pressed into the filler tube when inserting the pump nozzle into the filler tube. Otherwise you are unintentionally filling up the volume, which in case of heat can cause an expansion of the fuel. This can lead to an overflow of fuel or damage to parts of the fuel reservoir.

 The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly. Do not continue refuelling - otherwise the expansion volume is filled up.

Note

The fuel tank has a capacity of about

45 litres

, containing a reserve of

7 litres

Fuel 157 Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 158 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

158 Inspecting and Replenishing

Inspecting and Replenishing Engine compartment

Bonnet remote release

Fig. 139 Release lever engine compart ment lid Bonnet remote release

– Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the left-hand side  fig. 139 .

The bonnet jumps out of its lock as a result of the spring force.

Opening and closing the bonnet.

Fig. 140 Radiator grille: Locking lever/securing the bonnet with the bonnet support Opening the bonnet

– Unlock the bonnet  fig. 139 .

– Ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen

before opening

the bonnet otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork.

– Pull on the locking lever  fig. 140 - left, the bonnet is then unlocked.

– Grip the bonnet and lift it up.

– Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the opening designed for it  fig. 140 - right.

Closing the bonnet

– Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support. Press the bonnet support into the holder designed to hold it.

– Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of about 20 cm into the lock - bonnet

do not press down on it

WARNING



Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping.



For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed when driving. One should therefore check that the lock has in fact engaged properly after closing the bonnet.



Stop your vehicle immediately while driving if you notice that the lock is not properly engaged and close the bonnet properly - risk of an accident!

Working in the engine compartment

Particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine compartment!

There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable rules of safety. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area

 .

s33o.book Page 159 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Inspecting and Replenishing 159 WARNING



Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping.

 

Switch off the engine and pull out the ignition key.

Apply the handbrake firmly.



If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever into Neutral, or if it is fitted with automatic gearbox, move the selector lever into position P.

   

Allow the engine to cool down.

Keep children clear of the engine compartment.

Do not touch any hot engine parts - risk of burns!

Never spill oil and other fluids over the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the anti freeze contained in the coolant) may ignite!



Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the battery.



Never place your hand into the radiator fan as long as the engine is still warm. The fan might suddenly start running!



Never open the cap of the coolant expansion bottle as long as the engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!



Cover over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir with a large cloth when opening it as protection for your face, hands and arms from hot steam or hot coolant.



Do not let objects, such as e.g cleaning cloth or tools lie in the engine compartment.



If you wish to work under the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks: the car jack is not sufficient for this - risk of injury!



In cases where it be necessary to carry out inspection work when the engine is running there is an additional risk from rotating parts (e.g. the V-ribbed belt, alternator, radiator fan) and from the high-voltage ignition system. Please observe in addition the following:



Never touch the electrical cables of the ignition system.



Absolutely avoid any jewellery, loose items of clothing or long hair from getting into the rotating parts of the engine - Hazard! Therefore remove any jewellery beforehand, tie up your hair and wear tight fitting clothing.



Please also comply with the warning instructions stated below when carrying out any essential work on the fuel system or on the electrical system:



Always separate the car battery from the electrical system.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips WARNING (continued)

  

Do not smoke.

Never carry out any work close to naked flames.

Always keep a working fire extinguisher at hand.

Caution

When replenishing fluids in the engine, always ensure that the fluids are on no account mixed up. This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage!

Overview of the engine compartment

The main inspection points.

Fig. 141 Diesel engine 1.6 ltr./77 kW

Coolant expansion bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery (below a cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

162 168 161 160 164 164

s33o.book Page 160 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

160 Inspecting and Replenishing Note

The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical.

Engine oil

Check engine oil level

The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine.

Fig. 142 Dipstick Checking the oil level

– Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature  .

– Switch the engine off.

– Open the bonnet  in “Working in the engine compartment” on page 158.

– Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to flow back into the oil sump and remove the dip stick.

– Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again fully.

– Then withdraw the dipstick again and read off the oil level.

Oil level within range

A – You must

not

top up the oil.

Oil level within range

A – You A

may

top up the oil. It is possible that the oil level may then be within range after doing this.

Oil level within range

A – You

must

top up the oil  oil level is within range A .

page 161. It is sufficient, once this is done, to keep the It is normal for the engine to consume oil. The oil consumption may be as much as 0.5 l/1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle. The oil consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres.

One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably every time after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches.

We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range

above this

A if the engine has been operating at high loads, for example during a lengthy motorway trip during the summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a high mountain pass,

but not

The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is too low  page 28, “Engine oil   ”. In this case, check the oil level as soon as possible. Top up with an appropriate quantity of oil.

Caution

 Always check the oil level on vehicles with engine 1.2 l/44 kW (with twin-valve system) when the engine is cold. Otherwise the measuring result is incorrect und oil could be incorrectly replenished - risk of engine damage!

 The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range damaging the catalytic converter.

A . Danger of 

Do not continue your journey

conditions prevailing to top up with oil. sional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage.

if for some reason it is not possible under the

Switch the engine off

and obtain profes-

Note

Engine oil specifications  page 200.

s33o.book Page 161 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Inspecting and Replenishing 161

Replenishing engine oil

– Inspecting the engine oil level  page 160.

– Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening.

– Pour in a suitable grade of oil in portions of 0.5 litres  page 200.

– Inspect the oil level  page 160.

– Carefully screw on the cap of the filler opening and push the dipstick in fully.

WARNING



Avoid dripping oil onto hot parts of the engine when topping up will oil - a risk of fire!



Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.

For the sake of the environment

The oil level must on no account be above the range wise be drawn in through the crankcase ventilation and may pass through the exhaust system to atmosphere. The oil may combust in the catalytic converter and damage it.

A  page 160. Oil will other-

Changing engine oil

The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or according to the service interval indicator  page 17.

WARNING



Only carry out the engine oil change, if you have the required professional knowledge!



Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.



First of all, let the engine cool down, wear an eye protection and gloves - risk of caustic burns due to hot oil.

Caution

You must not pour any additives into the engine oil - risk of engine damage! Damage, which results from such product, are excluded from the warranty.

 

For the sake of the environment

You must on no account pour oil into the ground or into the sewage system.

In view of the problems involved in properly disposing of old oil, the necessary special tools and the knowledge required for such work, we recommend that you have the oil and oil filter change carried out by an authorised Škoda Service Partner.

Note

After your skin has come in contact with the oil, you must thoroughly wash your skin.

Cooling system

Coolant

The job of the coolant is to cool the engine.

The cooling system does not require any maintenance under normal operating conditions. The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive of 40 %. This mixture not only provides antifreeze protection down to -25 °C but also protects the cooling and heating system from corrosion. It also prevents the formation of scale and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant.

You must therefore not reduce the concentration of antifreeze agent in the coolant by adding water, also not during the summer months or in countries with a warm climate.

The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at least 40 %.

You can increase the amount of antifreeze in the coolant if a higher concentration of antifreeze is necessary for climatic reasons but only up to 60 % (antifreeze protection down to approx. -40 °C). The antifreeze protection tails off above that concentration.

Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate (e.g. Sweden, Norway, Finland) are already factory-filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about -35 °C. In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 %.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 162 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

162 Inspecting and Replenishing Coolant

The cooling system is factory-filled with coolant (purple in colour), which complies with the specification TL-VW 774 G.

We recommend you only replenish with the anti-freeze indicated on the coolant expansion bottle.

Please contact an authorised Škoda Service Partner if you have any questions regarding the coolant or if you wish to fill up with a different coolant.

An authorised Škoda Service Partner can also supply you with the correct coolant additives.

Coolant capacity Petrol engines

1.2 ltr./44 kW - EU5 1.2 ltr./51 kW - EU5/EU2 DDK 1.4 ltr./63 kW - EU5 1.6 ltr./77 kW - EU4/EU2 DDK 1.4 ltr./132 kW TSI - EU5 1.2 ltr./63 kW TSI - EU5 1.2 ltr./77 kW TSI - EU5

Capacities (in liter)

5.5

6.6

7.7

Diesel engines

1.2 ltr./55 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./55 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./66 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

Capacities (in liter)

6.6

8.4

Caution



Other coolant additives may cause operational problems which, in particular, involves significantly reducing the anticorrosion effect.



Any faults or problems resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and, as a consequence of this, result in major engine damage.

Inspecting the coolant level

Fig. 143 Engine compartment: Coolant expansion bottle

The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment on the right.

– Switch the engine off.

– Open the bonnet  in “Working in the engine compartment” on page 158.

– Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle  fig. 143 . The coolant level when the engine is cold must lie between the “MIN” A markings. The level may also rise slightly above the “MAX” marking when the engine is warm.

A and “MAX” If the coolant level in the reservoir is too low, this is indicated by the warning light in the instrument cluster   page 28. However we recommend you check the level of the coolant on the container directly at regular intervals.

Loss of coolant

A loss of coolant is first and foremost an

indication of a leak

in the system. You should not merely top up the coolant in the reservoir. It is also important to have the cooling system inspected without delay by a specialist garage.

Losses can only occur through the pressure relief in the cap of the coolant expan sion bottle which is completely free of leaks if the coolant boils as a result of over heating and is forced out of the cooling system.

WARNING Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.

s33o.book Page 163 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Inspecting and Replenishing 163 Caution

One should contact a specialist garage as soon as possible if the source of over heating itself cannot be determined and removed, since there may be grave damage to the engine.

Replenishing the coolant

– Switch the engine off.

– Allow the engine to cool down.

– Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir  and unscrew the cap

carefully

by turning it to the left  .

page 162, fig. 143 – Top up the coolant.

– Screw the cap tight until it is heard to lock.

The coolant which you use for replenishing the system, must comply with one specific specification  page 161, “Coolant”. Do not use an alternative additive if the prescribed coolant additive is not available in exceptional cases. Just top up the system with water and as soon as possible arrange adjustment to correct the mixing ratio of water and coolant additive again by a specialist garage.

Only use fresh coolant for topping up the system.

Do not fill up over the “MAX” marking! Excess coolant which is heated up is forced out of the cooling system through the pressure relief valve in the cap of the coolant compensation bottle.

Wait until the engine has cooled down for a system which has suffered a major loss of coolant before pouring in coolant. This is necessary to avoid engine damage.

WARNING



The cooling system is pressurized! Do not open the cap of the coolant expan sion bottle if the engine is still hot - risk of scalding!



The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health. Avoid contact with the coolant. Coolant vapours are also harmful to the health. It is important, therefore, to always safely store any coolant additive in its orig inal container out of the reach of children - risk of poisoning!



If any splashes of coolant get into your eyes, rinse out your eyes immediately with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.



You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inadvertently swallowed coolant.

Caution Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the condi tions prevailing to top up with coolant. Switch the engine off

damage.

and obtain profes sional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine

For the sake of the environment

Do not re-use coolant if it is necessary to drain the coolant in the system. It should be collected and disposed of in compliance with environmental protection regulations.

Radiator fan

The radiator fan may switch on suddenly.

The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to the coolant temperature.

The radiator fan may continue running for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been switched off - even if the ignition is also off. It may also switch on suddenly after a certain time, if   the coolant temperature has risen because of an accumulation of heat or the warm engine compartment is heated up additionally by strong sunlight.

WARNING You must therefore be aware when working in the engine compartment that the fan may switch on suddenly - risk of injury!

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 164 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

164 Inspecting and Replenishing

Brake fluid

Inspecting the brake fluid level

Fig. 144 Engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir

The brake fluid reservoir is located on the left of the engine compartment. The brake fluid reservoir on right-hand steering models is positioned on the other side of the engine compartment.

– Switch the engine off.

– Open the bonnet  in “Working in the engine compartment” on page 158.

– Inspect the brake fluid level in the reservoir  between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.

fig. 144 . The level must be A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-and-tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads, and is perfectly normal.

There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” marking. If the brake fluid level is too low, this is indicated by the warning light instrument cluster 

further! Obtain professional assistance.

 lighting up in the page 30. In this case

stop immediately and do not drive any WARNING



Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.



If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.

Replacing brake fluid

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. This causes the fluid to absorb moisture from the surrounding air over a period of time. Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake system. The water content also lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid.

One may only use new genuine brake fluid from Škoda Auto. The brake fluid must comply with one of the following standards or specifications:    VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT4, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4.

We recommend that you have the brake fluid replaced by an

authorised Škoda Service Partner

as part of an Inspection Service.

WARNING



Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of the formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system. This greatly impairs the braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle.

Caution

Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Due to problems of disposal, the specialist tools and expertise required, we recom mend you have the brake fluid replacement carried out by an

authorised Škoda service partner

Battery

General information

Improper manipulation of the vehicle battery can cause damage to it. For this reason, we recommend you have all work on the vehicle battery carried out by an authorised Škoda service partner.

There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and burns when carrying out any work on the battery and on the electrical system. For this reason, it is essential to comply

s33o.book Page 165 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Inspecting and Replenishing 165

with the warning instructions  rules of safety.

stated below and with the general applicable

WARNING



The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled with the greatest of care. Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling batteries. Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs. The battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds after contact with the skin which take a long time to heal. Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, slin cracks). Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompanied by significant development of heat.



Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the battery vent openings. Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield! There is the danger of suffering blindness! If any battery electrolyte gets into your eye, rinse out your eye immediately with clear water for several minutes. Contact a doctor without delay.



Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. Contact a doctor immediately if you swallow battery electrolyte.

 

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.

Hydrogen is released when you charge a battery and a highly explosive gas mixture is produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on.



Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit (e.g. through metal objects, cables). Possible consequences of a short circuit: Melting of lead struts, explo sion and burning of the battery, jets of acid spurting out.



It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light, to smoke or to carry out any activities which produce sparks. Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices. Strong sparking represents a risk of injury.



the ignition as well as all electrical components and disconnect the negative cable (-) on the battery. If you wish to replace a bulb it is sufficient to switch off the appropriate light.

 

Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic burns! Replace a frozen battery.

of explosion and caustic burns!



Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the engine, Never jump-start the batteries which have a too low electrolyte level - risk Never use a battery which is damaged - risk of explosion! Immediately replace a damaged battery.

Caution

 You must only disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched off, otherwise the electrical system (electronic components) of the vehicle may be damaged. When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system of the vehicle, first disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the battery. Then disconnect the positive terminal (+).

 When reconnecting the battery, first connect the positive terminal (+) and only then the negative terminal (-) of the battery. You must on no account connect the cables wrongly - risk of a cable fire.

 Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the vehicle body otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork.

 Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the battery housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.

 If the vehicle was not used for 3 to 4 weeks, the battery may have discharged. This reason for this is that some equipment also draw current when in stand-by (e. g control units). You can prevent the discharging of the battery by disconnecting the negative terminal or charging the battery constantly with a very low charging current.

For the sake of the environment

A removed battery is a special type of waste which is harmful to the environment - contact your specialist garage regarding disposing of the battery.

Note

 Please also refer to the guidelines  battery.

 page 167, also after connecting the Batteries older than 5 years should be replaced.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 166 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

166 Inspecting and Replenishing

Battery cover

Fig. 145 The battery: Pull up the cover (automatic gearbox)/(manual gearbox)

The battery is located in the engine compartment below a plastic box.

– Unlock the interlock on the positive terminal side of the battery  fig. 145 - left.

– Pull up the cover in direction of arrow   fig. 145 - right (manual gearbox).

fig. 145 - left (automatic gearbox) or – The installation of the battery cover on the positive terminal side takes place in the reverse order.

Battery control

Fig. 146 The battery: Electrolyte level indicator

The battery is practically

maintenance-free

under normal operating conditions.

We recommend you have the electrolyte level regularly checked by a specialist garage, especially in the following cases.

 High outdoor temperatures.

  When making longer daily drives.

After reach charge  page 166.

In vehicles with a battery fitted with a colour indicator, or so-called magic eye  fig. 146 , the electrolyte level can be determined from the discolouration.

Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check.

  Black colour - electrolyte level is correct.

Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must be replaced.

Note

 The electrolyte level in the battery is also regularly checked by an authorised Skoda service partner as part of the Inspection Service.

 For technical reasons, the electrolyte level cannot be checked in vehicle batteries with the “AGM” designation.

 Vehicles with a “START-STOP” system are fitted with a battery control unit for controlling the energy level during the recurring engine start.

Operation in winter

The battery has to provide greater amounts of electricity during the winter. It also has only part of the initial power output at low temperatures that it has at normal temperatures.

A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C.

We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked by a specialist garage before the start of the winter, and recharged if necessary.

WARNING Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic burns. Replace a frozen battery.

Charging the battery

A properly charged battery is essential for reliably starting the engine.

– Read the warning notes  in “General information” on page 164 and  .

s33o.book Page 167 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Inspecting and Replenishing 167

– Switch the ignition and all electrical components off.

– Only for “quick-charging”: Disconnect both battery cables (first of all “negative”, then “positive”).

– Carefully attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals (red = “positive”, black = “negative”).

– You can now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the charger.

– When charging is completed: switch the charger off and unplug the mains cable from the power socket.

– Only then should you disconnect the terminal clamps of the charger.

– Reconnect the cables to the battery (first of all “positive”, then “negative”).

It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge the battery using low amperages (as for example from a

mini-charger

). Please also refer to the instructions from the charger manufacturer.

A charging current of 0.1 of the total battery capacity (or lower) is that which should be used until full charging is achieved.

It is, however, necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high amperages, so-called “

quick-charging

”.

“Quick-charging” a battery is

dangerous

 It requires a special charger and expertise. We recommend having this quick battery change undertaken by a specialist garage.

in “General information” on page 164. A discharged battery may already

freeze

allow battery electrolyte to flow out.

at temperatures just below 0 °C  . We recommend that you no longer use a battery which has thawed out because the casing of the battery may be cracked through the formation of ice and this would The vent plugs of the battery should not be opened for charging.

WARNING



Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic burns. Replace a frozen battery.



Never charge a battery which has a too low electrolyte level - risk of explo sion and caustic burns.

Caution

On vehicles with the “START/STOP” system, the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery, but only to the engine earth  page 184, fig. 160 .

Disconnecting and reconnecting the battery

On disconnecting and reconnecting the battery the following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault-free.

Operation

Electrical power window (operational faults) Car radio or radio navigation system - Entering the code number see the operating instructions for the car radio or radio navigation system Set hours Data in the multi-functional indicator are deleted.

Operating measure

  page 43  page 18 page 18 We recommend having the vehicle checked by an authorised Škoda Service Partner to ensure full functionality of all electrical systems.

Replacing the battery

You should only replace a battery with a new battery of the same capacity, voltage (12 V), amperage and of the same size. Suitable vehicle battery types are available from authorised Škoda service partners.

We recommend you have a battery change carried out by an authorised Škoda service partner to ensure the new battery is fitted properly and the original battery id disposed according to the regulations.

Caution

Vehicles with a “START-STOP” system are fitted with special battery types which allow the battery control unit to control the energy level during the recurring engine start. This battery may only be replaced with a battery of the same type.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 168 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

168 Inspecting and Replenishing For the sake of the environment

Batteries contain poisonous substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner and under no circumstances must they be disposed of in regular domestic waste.

Windshield washer system

Fig. 147 Engine compartment: Wind shield washer fluid reservoir

The windshield washer reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the headlamp cleaning system. The reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the right side of the vehicle  fig. 147 . On some vehicles, the reservoir is located on the left side of the vehicle next to the battery.

The

filling level

of the container is about 3,5 litres and about 5,4 litres on vehicles which have a headlight washing system.

Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights. We therefore recommend using clean washing water together with the screen cleaner from Škoda genuine accessories (in winter additionally with antifreeze) which is capable of removing stubborn dirt. Follow the instructions for use on the packaging when using screen cleaning products.

You should always add antifreeze to the cleaning water in winter even if your vehicle is fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles.

It is also possible in exceptional cases to use methylated spirits when no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 %. Please note, however, that the antifreeze protection at this concentration is only adequate down to -5 °C.

WARNING Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.

Caution

 On no account should you add radiator antifreeze or other additives to the wind screen washer fluid.

 If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, you should only add cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights to the windscreen washer fluid. Please contact an authorised Škoda service partner who will help you choose a suitable cleaning agent.

Note

Do not take the filter out of the windscreen wash container when filling it up again with liquid otherwise dirt can get into the liquid transportation system and can lead to faults in operation of the windscreen wash system.

s33o.book Page 169 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Wheels and Tyres 169

Wheels and Tyres Wheels

General information

 New tyres do not have optimal adhesion immediately from first use. It is neces sary to drive the initial 500 km at moderate speed with a cautious driving style. You will also profit from longer tyre life.

 The tread depth of new tyres may differ because of design features and the configuration of the tread (depending on the type of tyre and the manufacturer).

 Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and, where possible, at a right angle in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.

 We recommend you regularly check tyres and rims for damage (punctures, cracks, buckling, deformations, etc). Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile.

 Tyre damage is often hidden. Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage. vehicle inspected.

Please reduce your speed immediately and stop if you suspect that a wheel is damaged.

Inspect the tyres for signs of damage (bulges, splits, etc.) If no visible damage is present, please drive at an appropriately slow speed and carefully to the nearest specialist garage in order to have your   Also protect your tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuel.

Immediately replace any dust caps of the valves which have got lost.

 Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running can be maintained when mounted them again.

 Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool, dry and, where possible, dark place. Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright.

Unidirectional tyres

The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre. This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres are fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.

Further information concerning the use of unidirectional tyres  page 173.

WARNING



New tyres during the first 500 km do not offer optimal grip and should there fore be run appropriately - risk of accident!



Never drive with damaged tyres - risk of accident!

Note

Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.

Tyre life

Fig. 148 An opened fuel filler flap with a tyre size and tyre inflation pressure table The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points: Tyre pressure

The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insufficiently or over-inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of your vehicle.

Correctly inflated tyres are of particular importance when travelling at least once a month and also before setting off on a long trip.

high speeds

. It is therefore good to check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare wheel, at The tyre inflation pressures for

summer tyres

are indicated on the inside of the fuel filler flap  fig. 148 . The inflation pressures for higher than those for summer tyres  page 172.

winter tyres

are 20 kPa (0.2 bar) The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 170 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

170 Wheels and Tyres

Always check the inflation pressure of tyres when cold. Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres. Adapt the inflation pressure of the tyres accordingly if your vehicle is carrying a significantly higher payload.

Tyre inflation pressure - Tyre size 185/55 R15

The same inflation pressure values apply to tyres of the tyre size 195/55 R15 as to tyres of the tyre size 185/55 R15 which are intended to be used with snow chains, see the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The tyres of the tyre size 185/55 R15, which are intended to be used with snow chains and are fitted on models Fabia Combi Scout, have the following inflation pressure values in kPa.

Engine

1.2/63 kW TSI 1,4/63 kW 1.2/77 kW TSI 1,6/77 kW 1,2/55 kW TDI CR 1,6/66 kW TDI CR 1,6/77 kW TDI CR

Partial load

220/230

Full load

220/230 220/290 230/300 230/300 230/300 220/290 220/290

Driving style

Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking (squealing tyres) increase wear-and tear on your tyres.

Balancing wheels

The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. There are a wide range of influences when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt through vibration in the steering.

You should have the wheels rebalanced since any imbalance increases wear-and tear on the steering, the suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted and each time a tyre is repaired.

Wheel alignment errors

Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear-and-tear on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety. Contact your specialist garage if you notice any unusual tyre wear.

WARNING



If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre must perform a higher rolling resistance. At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this. This can result in tread separation and even a tyre blowout.

 

Immediately replace the damaged rims or tyres.

Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.

For the sake of the environment

Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.

Wear indicators

Fig. 149 Tyre tread with wear indicators

The base of the tread of the original tyres has wear indicators 1.6 mm high, installed at right angles to the direction of travel. These wear indicators are located at 6 - 8 points depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre  fig. 149 . Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.

A remaining tread of just 1.6 mm, measured in the grooves of the tread next to the wear indicators, means that your tyres have reached their legally permissible minimum tread depth.

WARNING



You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down. The legally permissible minimum tread depth should be observed.

s33o.book Page 171 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

WARNING (continued)



Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface at high speeds on wet roads. One could experience “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled move ments of the vehicle - “swimming” on a wet road surface).

Changing wheels around

If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres, we recommend changing the front wheels around with the rear wheels. You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres.

It may be advantageous to swap the tyres over “crosswise” when uneven types of wear characteristic arise on the running surfaces of the tyres (but not in the case of unidirectional tyres). We recommend you get in touch with an authorised Škoda service partner. They have extensive knowledge about the combinations available.

We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life.

New tyres and wheels

Tyres and wheel rims are important design elements. One should therefore use the tyres and wheel rims which have been released for use by Škoda Auto. They are exactly matched to the vehicle type and therefore contribute significantly to good road holding and safe driving characteristics  .

Only fit radial tyres of the same type on all 4 wheels, size (rolling circumference) and, if possible, the same tread pattern on one axle.

The authorised Škoda Service Partners have access to the most current information about which tyres we have released for use on your vehicle.

We recommend that you have any work relating to tyres or wheels carried out by an

authorised Škoda Service Partner

. The authorised Škoda Service Partners have all of the necessary special tools and replacement parts available plus the required specialist knowledge and are also in a position to properly dispose of the old tyres. A large number of authorised Škoda Service Partners also have an attractive range of tyres and wheels available.

The tyre/wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents. Approval and licensing may differ according to the legisla tion prevailing in individual countries.

Wheels and Tyres 171

Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct type of tyre. Tyres do, for example, have the following

inscription

on their walls:

185/65 R 14 86 T

What this means is: 185 65 R 14 86 T Tyre width in mm Height/width ratio in % Code letter for the type of tyre - Diameter of wheel in inches Load index Speed symbol The following

speed restrictions

apply to tyres.

adial

Speed symbol

Q R U H S T V W

Permissible maximum speed

160 km/h 170 km/h 180 km/h 190 km/h 200 km/h 210 km/h 240 km/h 270 km/h The

date of manufacture

is also stated on the tyre wall (possibly only on the inside of wheel).

DOT ... 20 11...

means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of the year 20011.

Any

spare wheel

which differs from the tyres fitted to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres) should only be used only for a short time in the event of a punc ture and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving. It should be replaced as quickly as possible by a normal wheel.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 172 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

172 Wheels and Tyres WARNING



Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved for your model of Škoda Auto vehicle. Failure to observe this instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle - risk of accident! Approval and licencing of your vehicle on public roads may also become void as a result.



You must on no account drive at a higher speed than is permissible for your tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control over your vehicle.



Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.



Never fit tyres which have already been used without having adequate knowledge of their previous history. Tyres age even if they have not been used at all or only very little. A spare tyre must only be used in exceptional cases and only then when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.



Do not, where possible, replace individual tyres but at least replace them on both wheels of a given axle at the same time. Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels.

For the sake of the environment

Old tyres must be disposed of in conformity with the appropriate regulations.

Note

It is not normally possible to fit wheels from other models of cars for technical reasons. This may also apply in certain circumstances to the wheels of the same type of vehicle.

Wheel bolts

Wheels and

wheel bolts

are matched to each other in terms of design. Each time you fit other wheels - e.g. light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres - you must therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of spherical cap. This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system operates properly.

If you retrofit

wheel trims

(or have this done), please also ensure that an adequate flow of air remains assured for cooling the brake system.

The authorised Škoda Service Partners are instructed in the technical possibilities which exist regarding converting or retrofitting tyres, wheels and wheel trims.

WARNING



In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen when the car is moving - risk of accident!



The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. However, they must never be treated with grease or oil.



If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim can lossen when the car is moving - risk of accident! A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent defor mation of the contact surfaces on the rims.

Caution

The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Winter tyres

The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry roads if you fit winter tyres. Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice, snow and at temperatures below 7 °C because of their construction (width, rubber blend, tread pattern). This applies in particular to vehicles which are equipped with

low profile tyres

high-speed tyres

(code index H, V or W on wall of tyre).

Winter tyres must be mounted on all four wheels to obtain the best handling char acteristics.

You must only fit those types of winter tyre which are approved for your vehicle. The permissible

sizes of winter tyres

are stated in your vehicle documents. Approvals may differ because of national legislation.

Please remember that the tyres should be inflated to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) more than is the case for summer tyres  page 169.

Winter tyres no longer offer the same winter performance once the

tyre tread

has worn down to a depth of about 4 mm.

Ageing

also causes winter tyres to lose most of their winter performance properties - even in cases where the remaining tread depth is still clearly more than 4 mm.

Speed restrictions

apply to winter tyres as well as to summer tyres   .

page 171, You can fit winter tyres of a lower speed category to your vehicle provided that you also do not drive faster than the permissible maximum speed for such tyres, even if

s33o.book Page 173 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM the possible maximum speed of your vehicle is higher. The corresponding tyre cate gory can damage the tyres when exceeding the permissible maximum speed.

Please pay attention to the notes if you decide to fit winter tyres  page 169.

You can also fit so-called “all-year tyres” instead of winter tyres.

Please contact your specialist garage if there are any points which are not clear who will be able to provide you with information regarding the maximum speed for your tyres.

WARNING You must on no account drive your car at more than the permissible maximum speed for your winter tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control over your car.

For the sake of the environment

Fit your summer tyres on again in good time since summer tyres offer you better grip and handling on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as ar temperatures below 7 °C - the braking distance is shorter, there is less tyre noise, tyre wear is reduced and fuel consumption is reduced.

Note

Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.

Unidirectional tyres

The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by

arrows on the wall of the tyre

are fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.

. This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres Should it be necessary to fit on a spare wheel in exceptional cases with a tyre not dedicated to the running direction or in opposite running direction, please adopt a cautious style of driving as the tyre is no longer able to provide optimal grip and handling in such a situation. This particularly important on wet roads. Please refer to the additional instructions  page 176, “Spare wheel”.

You should have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible and restore the correct direction of rotation on all tyres

Wheels and Tyres 173

Snow chains

Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.

When driving on wintry roads, snow chains improve not only traction, but also the braking performance.

For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel/tyre combinations.

Wheel size 5J x 14 6J x 14 6J x 15 Depth (D) 35 mm 37 mm 43 mm Tyre size 165/70 185/60 185/55 Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than

12 mm

Remove the

full wheel trims

before installing the snow chains.

Observe the different national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains.

WARNING Please pay attention to the information in the supplied fitting instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.

Caution

You must take the chains off as soon as you drive on roads which are free of snow. They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle, damage the tyres and are rapidly destroyed.

Note

We recommend that you use snow chains from the Škoda genuine accessories.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 174 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

174 Accessories, changes and replacement of parts

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts General

Škoda vehicles have been built according to the latest discoveries in safety engi neering. Thus one should not change the condition in which the vehicle was deliv ered from the manufacturer without some thought.

If your vehicle is to be retrofitted with accessories, one part is to be replaced with a new one, or if technical modifications are to be carried out, please observe the following information: 

before

 Advise should always be obtained from an authorised Škoda Service Partner .

buying any accessories or parts and

before

making any technical changes  The guidelines and notes issued by Škoda Auto must be observed when making technical changes.

By adhering to the prescribed procedures, no damage whatsoever can arise to the vehicle, or to its vehicle- or operational safety. The vehicle will also meet the valid provisions of the German Road Traffic Licensing Regulation (StVZO) after the modi fications have been carried out. More information is available from an authorised Škoda service partner who will also be able to carry out all the necessary work correctly.

Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to opera tional faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because of the networking of the electronic components. This means this may put the vehicle's road safety at risk and can lead to increased wear on parts.

Any damage which is done caused by technical changes made without consulting a Skoda dealer is excluded from the guarantee - see guarantee certificate.

WARNING



Work or modifications on your vehicle, which have been carried out unpro fessionally, can cause operational faults - risk of accident!



We advise you, in your own interest, to only use Škoda Genuine Accessories and Škoda original parts which have been expressly approved for use on your Škoda. Reliability, safety and suitabiliity have been established for these Škoda original parts.



With other products, and despite out ceaseless analysis of the market, we are not able to assess nor guarantee their suitability for your vehicle even WARNING (continued) though in some cases these products may have operational approval or may have been released by a state testing body.

Note

 Škoda Genuine Accessories and Skoda original parts can be bought from author ised Škoda Service Partners who also professionally undertake the assembly of parts which were purchased there.

 For this reason we recommend you have all work carried out by authorised Škoda service partners.

 All Škoda original accessories from the original accessories catalogue, such as trailer hitch, child seats, etc., is approved.

 We recommend you also purchase car radios, antennas and other electrical accessories from an authorised Škoda service partner who you should also have install them.

s33o.book Page 175 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Breakdown assistance 175

Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance First-aid box and warning triangle

Fig. 150 Placing of the warning triangle

The first-aid box must be stored in such a way that it is immediately ready to hand.

A warning triangle with the maximum dimensions 39 x 68 x 450 mm can be attached to the trim panel of the rear wall with rubber straps  fig. 150 If you wish to equip your vehicle additionally with a warning triangle, please contact a specialist garage.

WARNING The first-aid box must be stored in such a way that the occupants do no suffer any injuries in the event of an emergency braking or a collision of the vehicle.

Note

Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.

Fire extinguisher

The fire extinguisher is attached with straps under the driver seat.

Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguisher.

The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person or company annu ally (please observe the various differing national legal requirements).

WARNING If the fire extinguisher is not correctly attached, in case of sudden manoeuvres or an accident it can be “thrown” through the interior compartment and cause injuries.

Note

 The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant and valid legal require ments.

 Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. If the fire extin guisher is used after the expiration date, its proper function is no longer assured.

 The fire extinguisher is only supplied in certain countries within the scope of delivery.

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 151 Luggage compartment: Storage compartment for vehicle too kit

The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel  fig. 151 or in the space for the spare wheel. There is also space here for the remov able ball for the trailer towing device.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 176 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

176 Breakdown assistance

The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts (depending on equipment fitted):  Wheel wrench,       Wire clamps for removing the full wheel trims, Towing eye, Adapter for the wheel bolts lock, Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps, Replacement lamp, Screwdriver.

Before placing the lifting jack back in its storage area, screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully.

WARNING



The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle. On no account attempt to lift a heavier vehicle or other loads - risk of injury!



Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely attached in the luggage compartment.

Spare wheel

The spare wheel is stowed in the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment below the floor covering.

Fig. 152 Luggage compartment: Spare wheel

The spare wheel lies in a well under the floor covering of the luggage compartment and is fixed in place along with a vehicle tool kit box using a special screw  fig. 152 .

One should check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel (at best when generally checking the tyre air pressures - see sign on the fuel filler flap  page 156) to ensure that the spare wheel is always ready to use.

Unidirectional tyres

If you have such tyres on your vehicle, please refer to the notes below:  The spare wheel provided with a car fitted with unidirectional tyres has different dimensions. The wheel is provided with a warning sticker.

  The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel.

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h with this spare wheel and pay particular atten tion while driving. Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.

 of the standard tyres.

 The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the inflation pressure Use this spare wheel only to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not intended for continuous use.

Changing a wheel

Preliminary work

The following steps should be carried out before actually changing the wheel.

– If it is necessary to change a wheel, park the vehicle as far away as possible from the traffic flow. The place you choose should be

level

– Have all the occupants

get out

. While changing a wheel, the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road (instead of behind a crash barrier).

– Apply the

handbrake

firmly.

– Engage

1st gear

or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, position the

selector lever into position P

– If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.

– Take the

vehicle tool kit

and the

spare wheel

 compartment.

page 175 out of the luggage

WARNING



If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights system and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the prescribed

s33o.book Page 177 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

WARNING (continued) distance from your vehicle. Comply with the national legal regulations. In this way you are protecting not only yourself but also other road users.



Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack - danger of suffering injury.

Caution

If you have to change a wheel on a slope first block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object in order to secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away.

Note

Comply with the national legal regulations.

Changing a wheel

Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible.

– Take off the full wheel trim  page 177 or the caps  page 178.

– Slacken the wheel bolts  page 178.

– Jack up the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is clear of the ground  page 179.

– Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper etc.).

– Take off the wheel.

– Fit on the spare wheel and tighten the wheel bolts slightly.

– Lower the car.

– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly, alternately and diagonally using the wrench (crosswise)  page 178. – Mount the full wheel trim/wheel trim cap or the caps.

 

Note

All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.

You must never grease or oil the wheel bolts!

 When fitting on unidirectional tyres, ensure that the tyres rotate in the correct direction  page 169.

Breakdown assistance 177

Subsequent steps

After changing the wheel, you must perform the following steps.

– Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided.

– Stow the replaced wheel in the luggage compartment.

–

Check

the

tyre pressure

on the spare wheel just mounted as soon as possible.

– Have the torque of

tightening torque 120 Nm

of the wheel bolts

checked

with a torque wrench as soon as possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening – Change the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about possibilities for getting repairs done.

WARNING It is necessary to observe the guidelines given on wheels” if the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres which are different to those it was fitted with at the works.



page 171, “New tyres and Note

 If you find, when changing the wheel, that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn, the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque.

 Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed to a workshop where the tight ening torque can be checked.

Full wheel trim

Fig. 153 Removing the full wheel trim Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 178 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

178 Breakdown assistance Pulling off

– Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the full wheel trim.

– Push the wheel key through the clamp, support the wheel key on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim  page 177, fig. 153 .

Installing

– First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel at the valve opening provided. Then press the full wheel trim into the wheel in such a way that its entire circumference locks correctly in place.

Caution

 Use the pressure of your hand, do not knock on the full wheel trim! Heavy knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into the wheel, can result in damage to the guide and centering elements of the full wheel trim.

 Check for yourself that the safety wheel bolt is located in the hole in the area of the valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached with a safety wheel bolt  page 179, “Securing wheels against being stolen”.

Wheel bolts with caps

The caps are designed to protect the wheel bolts.

Fig. 154 Changing a wheel: Pull off cap from the wheel bolt Pulling off

– Insert the

plastic clip

(in the car tool kit) sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the clip are positioned at the collar of the cap.

– Pull the cap off with the

plastic clip

 fig. 154 .

Installing

– Insert the caps onto the bolts.

Slackening and tightening wheel bolts

Slacken the wheel bolts before jacking up the vehicle.

Fig. 155 Changing a wheel: Slackening wheel bolts Slackening wheel bolts

– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt 12) .

– Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about

one

turn to the left  fig. 155 .

Tightening wheel bolts

– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt 12) .

– Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until it is tight.

WARNING Slacken the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) as long as the vehicle has not yet been jacked up - risk of an accident!.

12) Use the appropriate adapter for slackening and tightening the safety wheel bolts  page 179.

s33o.book Page 179 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Breakdown assistance 179 Note

 Apply pressure carefully with your you have a steady position.

foot

to the end of the wrench if it proves diffi cult to slacken the bolts. Hold tight on the vehicle when doing this and ensure that

Raise vehicle

You have to raise the vehicle with a lifting jack in order to be able to take off the wheel.

WARNING (continued)



Take suitable measures to prevent the base of the lifting jack from slipping off - risk of injury!

 

Place the lifting jack only on a solid and even surface.

Not positioning the lifting jack at the specified points can result in damage to the vehicle. The jack can also slip off if it does not have sufficient grip - risk of injury!



Never start the engine if the vehicle is lifted - risk of accident.



Never lie under the vehicle if the vehicle is only lifted with the vehicle lifting jack.



It is important to support the vehicle with suitable supporting blocks if you wish to work under the lifted vehicle - risk of injury!

Securing wheels against being stolen

You need a special adapter for slackening the safety wheel bolts.

Fig. 156 Changing a wheel: Jacking points for positioning lifting jack

– Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point - engraving in the lower sill - which is closest to the wheel to be removed  fig. 156 .

– Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up until its claw is positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill.

– Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the vertical web on the engraving of the lower sill A and the bottom base plate of the lifting jack with its complete surface against firm ground.

A is resting flat – Turn the lifting jack up further until the wheel is just clear of the ground.

Ground below the lifting jack which is soft and slippery

the

surface is smooth

can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if , such as cobbled stones, a tiled floor, etc.



WARNING Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed - risk of injury.

Fig. 157 Illustration image: Safety wheel bolt with adapter

– Pull off the full wheel trim/cap from the wheel hub or cap from the safety wheel bolt.

– Insert the adapter A with its toothed side into the inner toothing of the head of the safety wheel bolt A  fig. 157 .

– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the adapter A .

– Slacken the wheel bolt, or tighten it firmly  page 178.

– Reinstall the full wheel trim/wheel cap after removing the adapter or place the cap onto the safety wheel bolt.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 180 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

180 Breakdown assistance

– Have the

tightening torque checked

with a torque wrench as soon as possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening torque of

120 Nm

The safety wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them (one safety wheel bolt per wheel) can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided.

It is meaningful to note the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter or the rear side of the safety wheel bolts. You can obtain a replacement adapter from an authorised Škoda Service Partner, if necessary, by quoting this number.

We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle. It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit.

Caution

 Damage can occur to the adapter and safety wheel bolt if the safety wheel bolt is tightened up too much.

 On steel wheels, the theft-deterrent wheel bolt must always be installed in the hole, which is close to the valve. Otherwise the full wheel trim cannot be mounted and the full wheel trim can be damaged during the assembly.

Note

The set of safety wheel bolts can be obtained from a specialist garage.

Tyre repair kit

General information

The tyre repair kit is located in a box under the carpet in the luggage compartment .

Use the tyre repair kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to 4 mm. Do not remove foreign bodies, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre!

The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately.

The repair with the tyre repair kit is

not at all intended to replace

a permanent repair on the tyre, this repair only serves to reach the next specialist garage.

Do not use the tyre repair kit:

 to repair wheel damage,  in outside temperatures of less than -20 °C (-4 °F),     with tears or punctures greater than 4 mm in size, to repair damage to the tyre wall, when driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre, if the use-by-date (see inflation bottle) has passed.

WARNING



If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights system and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the prescribed distance from your vehicle. Comply with the national legal regulations. In this way you are protecting not only yourself but also other road users.



Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the traffic flow. Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible.



A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre.

 

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

 

Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.

Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes.

Sealant is hazardous to heath. Remove immediately if it comes into contact with the skin.

For the sake of the environment

Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in accordance with environmental protection regulations.

  

Note

Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the tyre repair kit.

You can purchase a new bottle of sealant from the range of the Škoda original accessories.

Change the wheel that was repaired using the tyre repair kit or consult a specialist garage about possibilities for getting repairs done.

s33o.book Page 181 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Components of the tyre repair kit

Fig. 158 Components of the tyre repair kit

The tyre repair kit is made up of the following parts: Valve remover Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph” Inflation hose with plug Compressor Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Replacement valve core  page 72 Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent The valve remover A has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core. This is the only way in which you can remove and re-install the valve core from the tyre valve. The same also applies to the replacement valve core A .

Preparing to use the tyre repair kit

Before using the tyre repair kit, carry out the following preparatory work: – Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the traffic flow. Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible.

Breakdown assistance 181

– Have

all the occupants get out.

While changing a wheel, the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road (instead of behind a crash barrier).

– Switch off the engine and engage

1st gear

or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, position the

selector lever into position P

– Apply the

handbrake

firmly.

– Check whether you can carry out the repairs with the tyre repair kit  “General information”.

page 180, – If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.

– Remove the

tyre repair kit

from the luggage compartment.

– Stick the sticker A  fig. 158 on the dash panel in view of the driver.

– Do not remove the foreign body, e.g. screw or nail, from the tyre.

– Unscrew the valve cap.

– Use the valve remover surface.

A to remove the valve core and place it down on a clean

Seal and inflate tyres

Sealing tyres

– Forcefully shake the tyre inflator bottle A  fig. 158 several times.

– Firmly screw inflation hose tion A A onto the tyre inflator bottle in a clockwise direc . The film on the cap is pierced automatically.

– Remove the plug from the inflation hose tyre valve.

A and plug the open end fully into the – Hold the bottle A with the floor facing upwards and fill the whole sealing agent in the tyre inflator bottle into the tyres.

– Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve.

– Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover A .

Pumping up the tyres

– Screw the tyre inflation hose tyre valve.

A  fig. 158 of the air compressor firmly onto the – Check whether the air release valve A is closed.

– On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever into Neutral.

– Start the engine and run it in idle.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 182 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

182 Breakdown assistance

– Insert the plug A into the 12 Volt socket.

– Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch A .

– Allow the air compressor to run until reaching a pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar. Maximum run time of 8 minutes  !

– Switch off the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch.

– If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation hose A from the tyre valve.

– Drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre.

– Screw the tyre inflation hose of the air compressor valve and repeat the inflation procedure.

A firmly back onto the tyre – If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either, this means the tyre has sustained too much damage. You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit  .

– Switch off the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch.

– Remove the tyre inflation hose A from the tyre valve.

After reaching a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, you can drive at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).

Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes  driving for 10 minutes”.

page 182, “Check after

WARNING



During inflation, the tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot- risk of injury!



Do not place hot tyre inflation hoses or hot air compressors on flammable materials - risk of fire!



If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bar, this means the damage sustained was too serious. The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre. Do not drive the vehicle. Get professional assistance.

Caution

Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest - danger of over heating! Allow the air compressor to cool a few moments before switching it on again.

Check after driving for 10 minutes

Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes.

If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less:

–

Do not drive the vehicle!

You cannot properly seal with tyre with the breakdown kit.

– Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.

If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more:

– Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value (see inside of fuel filler cap).

– Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).

Jump-starting

Initial steps

You can use the battery of another vehicle for jump-starting yours if the engine does not start because the battery on your vehicle is flat. You will require jump-start cables for this purpose.

Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The discharged battery in your vehicle.

capacity

(Ah) of the battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the

Jump-start cables

Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and insu lated terminal clamps. Please pay attention to the manufacturer's instructions.

Positive cable -

colour coding in the majority of cases red.

Negative cable -

colour coding in the majority of cases black.

WARNING



A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C. In case of frozen battery carry out no jump-starting - risk of explosion! Also after thawing of the battery there is a risk of caustic burns due to leaking acid. Replace the frozen battery.

s33o.book Page 183 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Breakdown assistance 183 WARNING (continued)



Please pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the engine compartment



page 158.

Note

 There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.

 The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehicle.

 Switch off the car phone. Heed the advice concerning the use of mobile phones in such a situation.

 We recommend you buy jump-start cables from a car battery specialist.

Start engine

Fig. 159 Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle: A - flat vehicle battery, B - battery providing current

– Attach the other end A to a solid metal part which is connected firmly to the engine block, or to the engine block itself  .

Starting engine

– Start the engine of the vehicle providing current and run the engine at idling speed.

– Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

– Interrupt the attempt at starting an engine after 10 seconds if it does not start right away and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.

– Disconnect the cables on the engine in exactly the

reverse order

they were connected up.

WARNING



The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact with each other. Furthermore, the cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle - risk of a short circuit!



Do not affix the jump starting cables to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started.

 

Do not affix the cable end

to parts of the fuel and brake system.

Run the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in the engine compartment.



Do not bend over the batteries - risk of caustic burns!

 

The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.

from the battery - risk of an explosion!



Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes etc.) away Never jump-start the batteries which have a too low electrolyte level - risk of explosion and caustic burns!

It is important to connect the jump-start cables in the correct order.

Connecting positive terminals

– Attach one end A .

to the positive terminal  fig. 159 of the discharged battery – Attach the other end A to the positive terminal of the battery supplying the

Connecting negative terminal and engine block

– Attach one end A .

A to the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 184 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

184 Breakdown assistance

Jump-starting on vehicles with the “START-STOP” system

Fig. 160 Jump-starting on vehicles with the START-STOP system

On vehicles with the “START/STOP” system, the negative cable of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery, but only to the engine earth  fig. 160 .

the vehicle

General

Manual transmission cars can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised.

Automatic transmission cars can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the automatic gearbox is damaged!

A tow

bar

is safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks. You can use a tow

rope

only if a suitable tow bar is not available.

Please pay attention to the following instructions if you are going to use a tow rope:

Driver of the towing vehicle

– Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the acceler ator particularly gently if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.

– In manual transmission cars, do not hit the gas pedal until the rope is taught.

The maximum towing speed is

50 km/h

Driver of the towed vehicle

– Switch the ignition on so that the steering wheel is not blocked and you can also operate the turn signal lights, the headlight flasher, the windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system.

– Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position

if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.

Note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is running. You will require significantly greater physical force to depress the brake pedal and to steer the vehicle if the engine is not running.

Ensure that the tow rope is always kept taught.

Caution

 If the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect, your vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground, or on a special vehicle transporter or trailer.

 The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km.

 When tow-starting or towing the vehicle, the towing rope should be elastic in order to protect both vehicles. Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material.

 One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing forces or jerky loadings. There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.

 Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the

towing eyes

provided for this purpose  page 185, “Front towing eye” and  page 185, “Rear towing eye”.

Note

 Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice. Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle. Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in.

 When towing pay attention the national legal regulations, especially with respect to drawing attention to the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed.

s33o.book Page 185 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM  The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle.

Front towing eye

The towing eye is stored in the box for the vehicle tool kit.

Rear towing eye

Breakdown assistance 185 Fig. 161 Front bumper: Cover/installing the towing eye

– Press on the left half of the cover at the point of the arrow  fig. 161 - left.

– Pull the cover out of the front bumper.

– Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop tightening, we recommend that you use for example the wheel wrench, the lashing eye of another vehicle or a similar object which you can push through the eye.

 fig. 161 - right. For – In order to reinstall the cover after screwing out the towing eye, insert it in the mounts and then press on the right side of the cover. The cover must engage firmly.

Caution

The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing.

Fig. 162 Rear towing eye

The rear towing eye is located below the rear bumper on the right  fig. 162 .

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 186 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

186 Fuses and light bulbs

Fuses and light bulbs Electric fuses

Replacing fuses in the dash panel

Defect fuses must be replaced.

Colour coding of fuses Colour

light brown brown red blue yellow white green

Maximum amperage

5 7,5 10 15 20 25 30

Fig. 163 Bottom side of the dash panel: fuse cover

Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind the safety cover.

– Switch the ignition off and also the electrical component affected.

– Carefully swivel the cover in the direction of arrow and pull it out  fig. 163 .

– Find out which fuse belongs to the component which is not operating  page 187, “Fuse assignment in the dash panel”.

– Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the fuse cover, insert it onto the respec tive fuse and pull out this fuse.

– Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips. Replace the defect fuse by a new fuse of the

same

ampere number.

– Insert the fuse cover into the dash panel in such a way that the guide lugs are guided into the openings of the dash panel and then lock them by pressing.

We recommend that you always have the small box of replacement fuses in your vehicle. You can obtain a box of replacement fuses from the range of Škoda original parts or from a specialist garage.

WARNING Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.

Caution

 Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system.

 Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.

Note

We recommend that you have these fuses replaced by a specialist garage.

s33o.book Page 187 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Fuses and light bulbs 187

Fuse assignment in the dash panel

Fig. 164 Schematic representation of the fuse box for vehicles with left-hand steering/right hand steering

Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.

No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Power consumer

S-contact START - STOP Instrument cluster, headlight range adjustment ABS control unit Petrol engine: Speed regulating system Reversing light (manual gearbox) Ignition Engine control unit, automatic gearbox Brake pedal switch, coolant fan Operating controls for the heating, control unit for air conditioning sys tem, parking aid, control unit for cornering lights, coolant fan The air conditioning system Mirror adjustment Control unit for trailer detection Control unit for automatic gearbox

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance

23 24 25 26 27 28 29

No.

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 30 31

Power consumer

Motor for halogen projector headlights with cornering light function Radio navigation system PDA Electrohydraulic power steering START - STOP - radio Daylight driving lights Mirror heater S-contact Engine control unit Engine control unit Fuel pump relay Fuel pump control unit Reversing light, fog lights with the function “CORNER” Operating controls for the heating, control unit for air conditioning sys tem, parking aid, mobile phone, instrument cluster, steering angle sender, ESP, vehicle voltage control unit, multifunction steering wheel Interior lighting, storage compartment and luggage compartment, side lights Central control unit of the vehicle Seat heaters Rear window wiper Not assigned Petrol engine: AKF valve, petrol engine: Control flap Injection, water pump Fuel pump Ignition Cruise control system, operation of PTC relay Lambda probe

Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 188 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

188 Fuses and light bulbs

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53

No.

32 33 34

Power consumer

High pressure pump, pressure valve Engine control unit Engine control unit Vacuum pump Power supply of ignition lock Main beam Rear fog light Fog lights Blower Heatable windscreen washing nozzles, windscreen cleaning system Not assigned Rear window heater Horn Front window wiper Central control unit for convenience system Anti-theft alarm system Cigarette lighter, power socket in the luggage compartment a) ABS, START-STOP - DC/DC converter ESP Turn signal lights, brake lights START-STOP - DC/DC converter infotainment Radio Electrical power window (front and rear) - left side Electrical power window (front and rear) - right side Parking light - left side Electric sliding/tilting roof

No.

54 55 56 57 58

Power consumer

START-STOP - instrument cluster Anti-theft alarm system Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG Headlight cleaning system Parking light - right side Left low beam, headlight range adjustment Low beam on the right a) If the engine is switched off already one electrical component which is connected can dis charge the battery.

Replacing fuses at the battery (manual gearbox, automatic gearbox DSG)

Fig. 165 The battery: fuse cover

– Press together the interlocks of the fuse cover simultaneously in direction of A fig. 165 and push out the cover in direction of arrow A .

– Release the fixtures in the openings cover upwards in direction of arrow A A .

using a flat screwdriver and fold the – Find out which fuse belongs to the component which is not operating.

– Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips. Replace the defect fuse by a new fuse of the

same

ampere number.

s33o.book Page 189 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Fuses and light bulbs 189 WARNING Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.

Caution

 Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system.

 Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.

Note

We recommend that you have these fuses replaced by a specialist garage.

Fuse assignment at the battery (manual gearbox, automatic gearbox DSG)

9 10 11 12 13

No. Power consumer

4 Electrical auxiliary heating system 5 6 7 8 Interior Glow plugs, coolant fan Electrohydraulic power steering ABS or TCS or ESP The radiator fan Not assigned ABS or TCS or ESP Central control unit Automatic gearbox electrical auxiliary heating system

Caution

Please refer to the following guidelines  in “Replacing fuses at the battery (manual gearbox, automatic gearbox DSG)” on page 188.

Note

The fuses 1 - 7 can be replaced by a specialist garage.

Replace fuses at the battery (automatic gearbox)

Fig. 166 Schematic representation of fuse assignment at battery

Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.

No. Power consumer

1 2 3 Dynamo Not assigned Interior

Fig. 167 The battery: Open the positive terminal cover/fuse cover Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 190 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

190 Fuses and light bulbs

– Open the positive terminal cover (+)  page 189, fig. 167 - left.

– Press onto the interlocks of the fuse covers and open the covers.

A  page 189, fig. 167 on the right – Press together the interlocks of the fuse cover the cover in the direction of the arrow.

A simultaneously and push out – Find out which fuse belongs to the component which is not operating  page 190, “Fuse assignment at the battery (automatic gearbox)”.

– Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips. Replace the defect fuse by a new fuse of the

same

ampere number.

WARNING Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.

Caution

 Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system.

 Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.

  right.

Note

We recommend that you have these fuses replaced by a specialist garage.

Some vehicles are only fitted with the cover A  page 189, fig. 167 on the

Fuse assignment at the battery (automatic gearbox)

Fig. 168 Schematic representation of fuse assignment at battery

Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.

7 8 9 10 11 12

No. Power consumer

1 2 Dynamo Interior 3 4 5 6 Electrical auxiliary heating system ESP Electrohydraulic power steering Glow plugs ESP The radiator fan The air conditioning system ABS Central control unit Automatic gearbox electrical auxiliary heating system

Caution

Please refer to the following guidelines  matic gearbox)” on page 189.

in “Replace fuses at the battery (auto-

s33o.book Page 191 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Fuses and light bulbs 191

Bulbs

Replacing bulbs

The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is replaced.

Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth, serviette or some thing similar.

Defect light bulbs should only be replaced with light bulbs of the same type. The designation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.

Changing certain bulbs is not something which you can do yourself, but requires to be done by a specialist. Other parts of the vehicle must be removed in order to change the light bulbs. This applies, in particular, to bulbs which can only be reached from the engine compartment.

We therefore recommend that you have any bulbs changed by a specialist garage or, in exceptional cases, by calling on other professional assistance.

Please note that the engine compartment is a hazardous area  page 158, “Working in the engine compartment”.

We recommend that you always have a small box of replacement bulbs in your vehicle. You can obtain replacement bulbs from Škoda original accessories or from a specialist garage.

A stowage place for spare bulbs is located in the box in the spare wheel.

Vehicles with LED separate daytime running lights

In vehicles with LED separate daytime running lights, the bulbs are replaced by a specialist garage.

Bulb - Overview Front headlight

Low beam Main beam Parking lights

Halogen headlight Halogen projector head lights

H4 LL H4 LL H7 LL H7 LL W5W LL, LED a) /W5W BL LL

Using the system Safety Driving Tips Front headlight

Turn signals Fog lights Daylight driving lights

Halogen headlight Halogen projector head lights

PY21W H8/HB4 b) P21W, LED a) c) a) b) c) Valid for RS vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights.

Valid for vehicles Scout.

Valid for Scout vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights.

Rear light unit

Reversing light Turn signals Brake lights Rear fog light Parking lights

Others

Side turn signal lights Licence plate light 3. Brake light Interior lighting front/rear Reading lights Luggage compartment light Lighting in storage compartment

Bulb

P21W PY21W P21W P21W 2x W5W

Bulb

WY5W C5W/T4W (5W) LED C10W W5W W5W W5W

WARNING



Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.



Bulbs H7 LL and H4 LL are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb - risk of injury!

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 192 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

192 Fuses and light bulbs WARNING (continued)



It is recommended to wear gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb.

Note

This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is assumed that no major complications will arise. Other light bulbs should be changed by your specialist garage.

Front headlight Low beam and main beam (halogen headlights)

Fig. 170 Removing the light bulb for the low beam and main beam light

– Remove the protective cap A  fig. 169 .

– Pull off the connector from the lamp, release the sprung wire clamp and pull out the lamp towards the rear  fig. 170 .

– Replace the lamp H4 LL, insert into the opening in the reflector (with the fixing lugs in the recesses), secure with the sprung wire clamp, mount the connector and position the protective cap.

– We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a Skoda Service Partner after replacing the light bulb.

Low beam and main beam/low beam (halogen projector headlights)

Fig. 169 Fitting position of the bulbs: Halogen headlights/halogen projector headlights Positions of the bulbs in the halogen headlamp

A - low beam, main beam and side lights A - front turn signal light

Positions of the bulbs in the halogen projector headlight

A - low beam/low and main beam A - Parking light/parking and main beam lights A - front turn signal light

WARNING Read and observe the warning notes



page 158, “Working in the engine compartment” before working in the engine compartment.

Fig. 171 Removing the light bulb for the low beam and main beam light/low beam light

– Remove the protective cap A  fig. 169 .

– Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left  and remove.

fig. 171

s33o.book Page 193 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM – Replace the halogen lamp H7 LL, insert the connector with the new halogen lamp and turn to the right up to the stop.

– Insert the protective cap.

– We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a Skoda Service Partner after replacing the light bulb.

Main beam (halogen projector headlights)

Fuses and light bulbs 193

Parking light at the front

– Remove the protective cap A or A  page 192, fig. 169 .

– Grasp the light bulb holder and pull it out of the headlight.

– Replace the light bulb in the light bulb holder and re-insert into the headlight.

Daylight driving lights and fog lights

Fig. 172 Removing the light bulb for the main beam light

– Remove the protective cap A  page 192, fig. 169 .

– Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left  and remove.

fig. 172 – Replace the halogen lamp H7 LL, insert the connector with the new halogen lamp and turn to the right up to the stop.

– Insert the protective cap.

– We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a Skoda Service Partner after replacing the light bulb.

Turn signal light (at the front)

– Turn the socket A  page 192, fig. 169 or the socket A out together with the light bulb for the turn signal light.

to the left and take it – Replace the defective light bulb.

– Insert the lamp holder with light bulb into the headlight. Secure the lamp holder by turning it to the right until it locks in place.

Fig. 173 Front bumper: Protective grille/removing the fog light

– Switch the ignition and all lights off.

– Grasp the grille at the points marked with the arrows  out.

fig. 173 - left and take it – Guide your hand into the opening in which the grille was located and press the spring bolt  fig. 173 - right.

– Take out the fog light.

– Turn the socket A with the bulb for daylight driving light or the socket the bulb of the fog light to the left up to stop and take it out.

A with – Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new lamp and turn to the right up to the stop.

– For the installation, first of all insert the fog light with the interlock to the side far away from the marking of the vehicle.

– Press into place the headlight onto the side facing the marking.

– First of all put the grille with the latch in place on the side opposite the marking.

– Press into place the protective grille onto the side facing the marking.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 194 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

194 Fuses and light bulbs

Cover of fog lights - Fabia Scout, Fabia RS Fog lights Fabia Scout, Fabia RS

Fig. 174 Front bumper: Fabia Scout/Fabia RS Removing the cover - Fabia Scout

– Switch the ignition and all lights off.

– Guide the wire clamp from the vehicle tool kit into the opening above the fog light  fig. 174 - left and remove the cover.

Removing the cover - Fabia RS

– Switch the ignition and all lights off.

– Guide one finger into the opening next to the fog light  remove the cover.

fig. 174 - right and – In order to reinstall the cover, first of all insert one part of the cover starting on the side opposite the marking. Then press the cover closed on the side facing the marking.

Fig. 175 Front bumper: Fog lights/changing the bulb Removing the fog light

– Screw out the screws  fig. 175 - left with the aid of the screwdriver, which is part of the vehicle tool kit 13) .

– Take out the fog light.

Changing the bulb and installing the fog light

– Press the locking button the socket A .

A  fig. 175 of the plug A and remove the plug from – Turn the socket A with the bulb to the left up to the stop and take it out.

– Change the bulb, insert again the socket with the new bulb and turn it to the right up to the stop.

– Connect the plug A to the socket A .

– Screw in the screws again and insert the cover. The cover must engage firmly.

13) Valid for Fabia Scout and Fabia RS.

s33o.book Page 195 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Licence plate light

Fig. 176 Remove the licence plate light

– Open the boot lid and unscrew the light glass  fig. 176 .

– Take the defective bulb out of the holder and insert a new one.

– Insert the glass cover of the light again and press it down to the stop - ensure that the sealing rubber is correctly seated.

– Screw on the light glass slightly.

Rear light unit

Fuses and light bulbs 195

– Replace the defective light bulb  page 195.

– When re-installing, first insert the rear light unit with the screw opening of the body  fig. 177 .

A into the – Carefully press the rear light unit into the body in such a way that the pins engage into the supports of the body.

A – Hold the rear light unit tight with one hand, screw on the nut with the other hand and tighten it  fig. 177 .

Caution

When removing and installing the rear light unit make sure not to damage the paint work of the vehicle and the rear light unit.

Note

For slackening and tightening the plastic nut use a coin.

Changing light bulbs in the rear light unit

Fig. 177 Remove the rear light unit/install the rear light unit

– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.

– Hold tight the rear light unit with one hand and unscrew the plastic nut with the other hand  fig. 177 - left.

– Grip the rear light unit and remove it carefully with loosening movements at an angle to the rear. Do not pull the grommet with the cables out of the body.

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Fig. 178 Rear light unit: Fitting position of the bulbs

– To replace a light bulb, turn the bulb connector of the light bulb to the left (in the direction of the arrows on the housing) and take it out of the housing  fig. 178 right.

– Replace the light bulb, put the bulb connector back into the housing and turn it to the right up to the stop (in the opposite direction of the arrows on the housing).

Fitting position of the light bulbs in the rear light unit  fig. 178 A - Rear fog light/Reversing light

Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 196 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

196 Fuses and light bulbs

A - Turn signal lights A - Brake lights A - parking lights

s33o.book Page 197 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Technical Data 197

Technical data

Technical Data General information

The details given in the official vehicle registration documents always take prece dence over the details in the Owner's Manual. Please refer to the official vehicle registration documents or consult a specialist garage concerning the engine with which your vehicle is equipped.

Used abbreviations

Abbreviation

kW rpm Nm g/km TSI TDI CR M5 AQ6 DQ7 N1 DPF

Importance

Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output Engine revolutions per minute Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilometre Petrol engine with a turbocharger and a direct fuel injec tion system Diesel engine with turbocharger and injection system Common Rail 5-speed manual gearbox 6-speed automatic gearbox 7-speed automatic gearbox DSG The vehicles of this category are designed and con structed for conveying goods with a maximum weight of 3.5 tons Diesel particle filter

Performances

The listed performance values were determined without performance-reducing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.

Weight

Fig. 179 Type plate

The indicated unloaded weight is for orientation purposes only. It is for the basic equipment variant of the vehicle not including special features or accessories. The unloaden weight contains a fuel tank topped up to 90 % and a driver weight of 75 kg.

It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the unloaded weight.

You need to include the following into the loading capacity:     Passengers, all luggage and other loads, Roof loads incl. the roof rack, When using the towing device, the corresponding drawbar load (max. 50 kg).

The following specifications are listed on the type plate  fig. 179 :

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 198 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

198 Technical Data

Permissible gross weight The permissible overall weight of the vehicle/trailer combination when the vehicle is being operated with a trailer Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load The identification plate is affixed to the lower part of the column between the front and rear doors on the front passenger side.

WARNING Do not exceed the permissible overall weight - risk of accident and damage to the vehicle.

Identification details

Fig. 180 Vehicle data sticker Vehicle data sticker

The vehicle data sticker  fig. 180 is located on the floor of the luggage compart ment and is also stated in the Service schedule.

The vehicle data sticker contains the following data: Vehicle identification number (VIN) Vehicle type Gearbox code, paint number, interior equipment number, engine output, engine code Partial description of the vehicle 7GG, 7MB, 7MG - vehicles with DPF  page 139

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand shock absorber dome. This number is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen (together with a VIN bar code).

Engine number

The engine number is stamped into the engine block.

Sticker on inside of fuel filler flap

The sticker is affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap. They contain the following data:  the prescribed type of fuel;   tyre size; Tyre pressure.

Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines

Depending on the range of the special equipment, style of driving, traffic situation, weather influences and vehicle condition, the consumption values which in practice result when using the vehicle can deviate from the indicated values.

Urban traffic

The consumption measurement in urban traffic begins with starting of the cold engine. Afterwards the normal urban traffic is simulated.

Non-urban traffic

For the consumption measurement in non-urban traffic the vehicle, as in daily motoring, is accelerated and braked several times in all gears. The vehicle speed changes within the range from 0 to 120 km/h.

Combined traffic

The consumption value in the combined traffic consists of 37 % from the value for the urban traffic and of 63 % from the value for the non-urban traffic.

s33o.book Page 199 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Technical Data 199

Dimensions

Dimensions (mm)

Length Width Width including exterior mirror

FABIA

4000 1642 1886

FABIA GreenLine

4000 1642 1886 a) b) Height Clearance Wheel base Track gauge front/rear 1498/1513 a) 1484 b) 134/149 a) /119 b) 2465 1433/1426 1484 119 2465 1417/1410 The value corresponds to the status with rough road package.

The value corresponds to the status with sport chassis.

FABIA SCOUT

4032 1658 1886 1498/1513 a) 1484 b) 134 2465 1433/1426

FABIA RS

4029 1642 1886 1492 129 2464 1423/1415

ESTATE CAR

4247 1642 1886 1498/1513 a) 1484 b) 135/149 a) /119 b) 2465 1433/1426

COMBI GreenLine

4247 1642 1886 1484 119 2465 1417/1410

COMBI SCOUT

4275 1658 1886 1498/1513 a) 1484 b) 135 2465 1433/1426

COMBI RS

4276 1642 1886 1494 129 2464 1423/1415

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 200 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

200 Technical Data

Engine oil specifications

The grade of engine oil should be selected in accordance with precise specifications.

The engine of your vehicle has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil which you can use throughout the year - except in extreme climatic regions.

You can mix various oils together with each other when refilling with oil. This does not, however, apply for models with flexible service intervals (QG1).

Engine oils are, of course, undergoing continuous further development. Thus the information stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publication.

Specialist garages are informed by Škoda Auto about current changes. We recom mend having this oil change undertaken by a specialist garage.

The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following must be indicated sepa rately or together with other specifications on the bottle.

Engine oil specifications for models with flexible service intervals (QG1) Petrol engines

1.2 ltr./44 kW - EU5 1.2 l/51 kW - EU5/EU2 DDK 1.4 ltr./63 kW - EU5

Specification

VW 503 00, VW 504 00 VW 503 00, VW 504 00 VW 503 00, VW 504 00

Content a)

2,8 2,8 3,2 1.4 ltr./132 kW TSI - EU5 1.2 ltr./63 kW TSI - EU5 VW 504 00 VW 504 00 3,6 3,6 a) 1.2 ltr./77 kW TSI - EU5 VW 504 00 3,6 Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings  page 160, “Check engine oil level”.

Diesel engines

1.2 ltr./55 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./55 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./66 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

Specification

VW 507 00 VW 507 00 VW 507 00 VW 507 00

Content a)

4,3 4,3 4,3 4,3

Engine oil specifications for vehicles with fixed service intervals (QG2) Petrol engines

1.2 ltr./44 kW - EU5 1.2 l/51 kW - EU5/EU2 DDK 1.4 ltr./63 kW - EU5 1.6 ltr./77 kW - EU4/EU2 DDK 1.4 ltr./132 kW TSI - EU5 1.2 ltr./63 kW TSI - EU5 1.2 ltr./77 kW TSI - EU5

Specification

VW 501 01, VW 502 00 VW 501 01, VW 502 00 VW 501 01, VW 502 00 VW 501 01, VW 502 00 VW 502 00 VW 502 00 VW 502 00

Content a)

2,8 2,8 3,2 3,6 3,6 3,6 3,6 a) Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings  page 160, “Check engine oil level”.

If the oils specified above are not available, oils according to ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 can be used once for refilling.

Diesel engines

1.2 ltr./55 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./55 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./66 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5 1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

Specification

VW 507 00 VW 507 00 VW 507 00 VW 507 00

Content a)

4,3 4,3 4,3 4,3 If the oils specified above are not available, oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 can be used once for refilling.

Caution

Only the above-mentioned oils may be used on vehicles with flexible service inter vals (QG1). We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will maintain the properties of the oil. In exceptional cases, you must top up only once engine oil complying with Specification VW 502 00 (only for petrol engines) or Specification VW 505 01 (only for diesel engines) to maximum 0.5 litres. You must not use other engine oils - risk of engine damage!

s33o.book Page 201 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Note

 Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle. Consequently, you will always have the correct engine oil for refilling.

 We recommend using a preservative from the Škoda original accessories offered by your Škoda dealer.

 For further information - see Service shedule.

Technical Data 201 Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 202 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

202 Technical Data

Engine 1.2 l/44 kW - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

44/5200

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) b) c) Vehicles of category N1.

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

108/3000

FABIA

155 16,5 1545/1515 a) 1090 (800/500) b) (900/500) c)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

3/1198

ESTATE CAR

156 16,7 7,5 4,7 5,7 132 1565/1520 a) 1110 (800/450) b) (900/450) c)

s33o.book Page 203 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Engine 1.2 l/51 kW - EU5/EU2 DDK

Output (kW per rpm)

51/5400

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) b) c) d) The value corresponds to the status with Greentec package.

Vehicles of category N1.

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

Technical Data 203 Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

112/3000

FABIA

163 14,9 1550/1520 b) 1095 (800/500) c) (900/500) d)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

3/1198

ESTATE CAR

164 15,0 7,3 (6,8) a) 4,5 (4,3) a) 5,5 (5,2) a) 128 (119) a) 1570/1525 b) 1115 (800/450) c) (900/450) d)

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 204 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

204 Technical Data

Engine 1.2 l/63 kW TSI - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

63/4800

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

160/1500 - 3500

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) b) c) d) e) The value corresponds to the status with Greentec package.

The value corresponds to the version with tires featuring optimized rolling resistance.

Vehicles of category N1.

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

FABIA

177 11,7 1571/1541 c) 1116 (1100/500) d) (1200/500) e)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

4/1197

ESTATE CAR

178 11,8 6,6 (6,3) a) 4,4 (4,3) b) 5,2 (5,1) a)b) 121 (117) a) (119) b) 1591/1546 c) 1136 (1100/450) d) (1200/450) e)

s33o.book Page 205 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Engine 1.2 l/77 kW TSI - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

77/5000

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight a) b) Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked The value corresponds to the status with Greentec package.

Vehicles of category N1.

Technical Data 205 Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

175/1500 - 4100

FABIA M5

191 10,1

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

4/1197

FABIA DQ7

189 10,2

COMBI M5

193 10,2

COMBI DQ7

190 10,3 6,8 (6,3) a) 4,5 (4,4) a) 5,3 (5,1) a) 124 (117) a) 7,0 4,4 5,3 124 1585/1555 b) 1130 1200/500 1619/1589 b) 1164 6,8 (6,3) a) 4,5 (4,4) a) 5,3 (5,1) a) 124 (117) a) 7,0 4,4 5,3 124 1605/1560 b) 1150 1200/450 1639/1594 b) 1184

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 206 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

206 Technical Data

Engine 1.4 l/63 kW - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

63/5000

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) b) c) Vehicles of category N1.

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

132/3800

FABIA

175 12,2 1559/1529 a) 1104 (1000/500) b) (1200/500) c)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

4/1390

ESTATE CAR

176 12,3 8,0 4,7 5,9 139 1579/1534 a) 1124 (1000/450) b) (1200/450) c)

s33o.book Page 207 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Engine 1.6 l/77 kW - EU4, EU2 DDK

Output (kW per rpm)

77/5600

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) b) c) Vehicles of category N1.

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

Technical Data 207 Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

153/3800

FABIA M5

190 10,4

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

4/1598

FABIA AQ6

185 11,5

COMBI M5

192 10,5

COMBI AQ6

186 11,6 9,1 5,6 6,9 165 10,2 6,0 7,5 180 1569/1539 a) 1114 1614/1584 (1000/500) b) (1200/500) c) 1159 a) 9,1 5,6 6,9 165 10,2 6,0 7,5 180 1589/1544 a) 1134 1634/1589 (1000/450) b) (1200/450) c) 1179 a)

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 208 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

208 Technical Data

Engine 1.4 l/132 kW TSI - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

132/6200

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

250/2000 - 4500

FABIA RS

224 1718 1318

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

4/1390

COMBI RS

226 7,3 7,7 5,2 6,2 148 1713 1313

s33o.book Page 209 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Engine 1.2 l/55 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

55/4200

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) b) c) d) e) Unloaded weight with special equipment up to 1,280 kg.

Unloaded weight with special equipment more than 1,280 kg.

Vehicles of category N1.

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

Technical Data 209 Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

180/2000

FABIA

166 14,2

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

3/1199

FABIA GreenLine

172 14,2

ESTATE CAR

167 14,3

COMBI GreenLine

172 14,3 4,8 a) /4,9 b) 3,3 a) /3,4 b) 3,8 a) /3,9 b) 99 a) /102 b) 4,1 3,0 3,4 89 1644/1614 c) 1189 1658/1628 (1000/500) d) (1200/500) e) 1203 c) 4,8 a) /4,9 b) 3,3 a) /3,4 b) 3,8 a) /3,9 b) 99 a) /102 b) 4,1 3,0 3,4 89 1664/1619 c) 1209 1674/1629 (1000/450) d) (1200/450) e) 1219 c)

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 210 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

210 Technical Data

Engine 1.6 l/55 kW TDI CR - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

55/4000

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) b) c) Vehicles of category N1.

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

195/1500 - 2000

FABIA

166 14,1 1659/1629 a) 1204 (1000/500) b) (1200/500) c)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

4/1598

ESTATE CAR

167 14,2 5,1 3,6 4,2 109 1679/1634 a) 1224 (1000/450) b) (1200/450) c)

s33o.book Page 211 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Engine 1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

66/4200

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) Vehicles of category N1.

Technical Data 211 Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

230/1500 - 2500

FABIA

176 12,6 1659/1629 a) 1204 1200/500

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

4/1598

ESTATE CAR

177 12,7 5,1 3,6 4,2 109 1679/1634 a) 1224 1200/450

Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 212 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

212 Technical Data

Engine 1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR - EU5

Output (kW per rpm)

77/4400

Performances

Maximum speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO 2 (in g/km)

Urban Non-urban Combination CO 2 emission - combination

Weight (in kg)

Permissible gross weight Unloaden weight ready for work Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked a) Vehicles of category N1.

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

250/1500-2500

FABIA

188 10,9 1674/1644 a) 1219 1200/500

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm 3 )

4/1598

ESTATE CAR

190 11,0 5,1 3,6 4,2 109 1694/1649 a) 1239 1200/450

s33o.book Page 213 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Index 213 Index A

Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 110 Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Alternator Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Antilock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Antilock brake system (ABS) Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Assistance systems Start Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Auto Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Emergency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . . 99 Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Automatic vehicle wash systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Automatic wiper/washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Using the system Safety Driving Tips B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 164 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Operation in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Bicycle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 158 Boot lid Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Brake Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Brake system Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Button on the driver's door Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Electrical power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Car jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Car state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

General Maintenance

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Changing wheels around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Child safety seat on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Classification into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Children and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Climatronic Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Setting temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . . . 83 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Clothes hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Cockpit General view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Convenience operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Converting/masking over headlights . . . . . . . . . 145 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Coolant level Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Coolant quantity Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 214 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

214 Index

Coolant temperature/coolant level Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Cruise control Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Cup holder front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Daylight driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 193 Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 De-icing the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Diesel engines Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Diesel particle filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Diesel particlulate filter Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Door Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Driving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Electric power-operated window Operational faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Electric sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Electrical power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Electrically adjustable rear mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Electronic Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Electronic stability programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Electronic stability programme (ESP) Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Emergency locking of the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Engine compartment Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Engine electronics Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 144 ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Exhaust gas Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Exhaust gas inspection Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Exterior mirror heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Fastening elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 First-aid box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Fixing net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 193 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27 Fog lights with the function CORNER . . . . . . . . . . 47 Foldable luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . 64 Force limiter of the power windows . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Front headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 141 Saving energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Fuel reserve Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Full wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Fuse Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Gearbox mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Gearshift indicator for changing gears . . . . . . . . . 18 General view Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

s33o.book Page 215 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM Hazard warning light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Headlights Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Heated windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Heating the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Iinterior lighting Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Interior light Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Interior lighting Version 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Version 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Interior monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Intermittent wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Jacking points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183

Using the system Safety L

Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Leather care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Lights converting/masking over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Liquid in reservoir for windscreen washer system Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Lock Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 35 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Locking and unlocking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Locking of the door in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 192 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Folding hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Luggage compartment - variable loading floor . 64 Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 63 Luggage compartment door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Luggage net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49, 192 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Manual shifting of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Memory for the on-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Connection with the hands-free system . . 103

Index 215

Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

New tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Opening a single door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Opening the door Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Operation in winter Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 De-icing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Overview of the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 159

Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Parking ticket holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 216 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

216 Index

Petrol engines Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Raise vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Rear mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Rear-view mirror Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Recharge battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Synchronisation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Removing seat squabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Roof luggage rack system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Running in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Safe securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Safety information Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Saving electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Seat belt height adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 taking off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Selector lever lock Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Service Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Setting temperature Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Stability system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Start Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Steering force assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Storage box Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Storage facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Switch off Anti-spin regulation (ASR) Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Systems Start Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Temperature outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The first 1 500 kilometres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Tourist light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Towing eye front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Towing protection monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Traction control system (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Two-way radio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Tyre pressure Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Tyres Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

s33o.book Page 217 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Index 217 U

Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Unidirectional tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 unlock Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 35 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Uphill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Vehicle interior lighting Version 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Version 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Washing vehicle by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Wax treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 slackening and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Wheel bolts lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 177 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Using the system Safety Driving Tips

Windows de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Windscreen Wiper and Washer System Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Wiper blades Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

XDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 218 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

218 Notes

s33o.book Page 219 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM

Notes 219 Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data

s33o.book Page 220 Saturday, April 16, 2011 9:41 AM Škoda Auto pursues a policy of constant product and model development. We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape, equipment and engineering, may be introduced at any time. The information about scope of delivery, appearance, performances, dimensions, weight, fuel consumption, stand ards and functions of the vehicle is only correct at the time of publication. Certain items of equipment might only be installed later on (information given by the local Škoda Service Partner) or only envisaged for particular markets. It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data, illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner's Manual.

Reprinting, reproduction or translation, either in whole or in part, is not permitted without the written consent of Škoda Auto.

Škoda Auto expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.

We reserve the right to make changes to this document.

Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.

Minimisation of fuel consumption and CO

emissions

– Start-stop system* – Recovery* – Indication of recommended gear*

Weight reduction

– Optimisation of high-strength panels, reduction of thickness in panels and other materials – Replacement of spare wheel with tyre repair kit

Reduction of energy consumption

– Use of energy-saving electromechanical steering instead of hydraulic type ày}rvr|j}rxwxonoÔlrnwlxopnwn{j}x{| – Optimisation of operating consumption and electrical current consumption

Optimisation of aerodynamic- and rolling resistance

– Additional aerodynamic spoilers* – Additional covers at rack (CD covers)* – Optimised cooling (input grid, additional seal)* – Reduction by 15 mm* with frame – Ro-Wi tyres (wheels with low rolling resistance)* * realised in the Greenline 2 series

Recyclability

– All models currently in production homologized in comformity with the requirements for recyclability (EU Directive 2005/64/EC) – Use of recyclable, environmentally-friendly materials – Use of recycled materials with the parameters of the new material preferred – Labelling of materials for the purpose of making sorting easy

How you can contribute to a cleaner environment

The fuel consumption of your Škoda - and thus the level of pollutants contained in the exhaust - is also determined by how you drive.

The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how you personally handle your vehicle. This Owner's Manual tells you how to drive your Škoda to achieve the minimum impact on the environment, and how to save money at the same time. Look up „Environment“ in the Index to find out more.

Please also refer to all the texts identified with a Owner's Manual.

in this

Make your contribution - for the sake of the environment.

www.skoda-auto.com

Návod k obsluze Fabia anglicky 05.11

S55.5610.07.20

5J6 012 003 HS

Hello! I'm your AI assistant for the Škoda Fabia Owner's Manual. I have read the entire document and can answer your questions about vehicle controls, safety features, maintenance, and more. Ask me anything!

Show related prompts

Assistant typing

Assistant is out of keyboard. Please, try again later.

Key features

Comprehensive guide for Škoda Fabia owners
Includes safety information and driving tips
Covers basic maintenance and troubleshooting
Provides details on vehicle controls and features

Frequently asked questions

The Service Interval Display can only be reset if a service message is shown. It is recommended to have this resetting performed by a specialist garage.

If the symbol  in the instrument cluster flashes, it means that either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Please refer to the guidelines in the owner's manual.

Adjusting the steering wheel ensures a safe driving position and allows the airbag system to properly protect you. The distance between the steering wheel and your chest should be at least 25 cm.